Yamaha CLP-295GP Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: CLP-295GP

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: Handleiding

CLP-295GP

OWNER'S MANUAL

Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS„ on pages 3-4.

IMPORTANT

—Check your power supply—

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas

a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the

voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change

the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel.

For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CLP-295GP

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

92-469 1

Introduction

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 3

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may

have accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects

on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll

anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke

should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used

for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-

connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause

overheating in the outlet.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.

Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in

damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold

or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembly

Location

(1)B-11 1/2

4 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the

volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the

volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• In the case of a model with a polished ﬁnish, gently remove dust and dirt with a

soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the

instrument's ﬁnish.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not

use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping

cloths.

•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and do not insert a

ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key

cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and

unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• In the case of a model with a polished ﬁnish, bumping the surface of the

instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the ﬁnish to

crack or peel. Use caution.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do

not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall

over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-

ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the

possibility of accident or injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them

periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data

• Current data (page 45) is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument

before saving. Save the data to a USB storage device/external device such as a

computer.

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save

important data to a USB storage device/external device such as a computer.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

(1)B-11 2/2

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 5

Introduction

Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-295GP.

In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual

thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.”

Also, a separate “Data List” is provided.

Introduction:

Please read this section ﬁrst. In the “Application Index” section on page 8 and “Features” on page 10,

you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations.

Basic Operation: This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you play the

Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to the section enti-

tled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 101, or the “Index” on page 117.

Detailed Settings: This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Refer to

this section as necessary.

Appendix: This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference material.

Data List: XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

•The models CLP-295GP will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual.

•The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat

different from those on your instrument.

•Copying of commercially available software or music data for purposes other than your personal use is strictly prohibited.

Trademarks

• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation.

• SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the

unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit.

Tr ansport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instru-

ment to excessive vibration or shock.

After transporting the instrument, do the following to ensure optimum performance of the iAFC function (page 83):

• Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova.

• Perform the automatic adjustment of the iAFC function (page 84).

Included Accessories

• “50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows

• Owner’s Manual • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide

• Data List

• Bench (included or optional depending on locale)

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has

license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software and MIDI ﬁles, etc. Any

unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright

has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. This device is capable of using various types/formats of

music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play

them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.

6 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Table of contents

Introduction.......................................................... 2

PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 3

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .................................................................................................................... 5

Included Accessories....................................................................................................................................................... 5

Application Index ................................................................................................................................... 8

Panel Controls and Terminals.............................................................................................................. 10

Introduction to the Controls................................................................................................................ 12

Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 14

About the key cover ...................................................................................................................................................... 14

About the music rest..................................................................................................................................................... 14

About the music braces................................................................................................................................................. 14

About the Lid ................................................................................................................................................................ 15

Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 16

Adjusting the display contrast ...................................................................................................................................... 17

Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 17

Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 17

Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment............................................................................................................... 18

Basic Operation .................................................. 19

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 20

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 22

Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 22

Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs ....................................................................................................... 24

Practicing with the Repeat Playback function and the preset songs .......................................................................... 25

Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 27

Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 27

Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 28

Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 29

Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 31

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 33

Using the metronome................................................................................................................................................... 35

Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 36

Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 36

Recording a performance without specifying the recording part .............................................................................. 37

Recording a performance of several different parts ................................................................................................... 41

Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 42

Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]................................................... 45

Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save] ........................................................................................... 48

Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a USB storage device ... [Delete].......................... 49

Renaming files ... [Rename] ......................................................................................................................................... 50

Copying files ... [Copy]................................................................................................................................................. 51

Moving files ... [Move].................................................................................................................................................. 53

Introduction

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 7

Making folders in the USB storage device ... [MakeDir] ............................................................................................ 54

Formatting a USB storage device ... [Format]............................................................................................................. 54

Automatically selecting a song in storage media ... [SongAutoOpen]....................................................................... 55

Changing the type of characters on screen ... [CharacterCode]................................................................................. 55

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data............................................. 56

Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 56

Turning part playback on and off ................................................................................................................................ 59

Supported song data type ............................................................................................................................................. 59

Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 60

Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 60

Connecting to a USB storage device ............................................................................................................................ 62

Connecting a personal computer................................................................................................................................. 65

Detailed Settings ................................................ 67

Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 68

Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 68

Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 71

Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] ................................................ 73

Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] ........................................................ 76

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] .............................................................................. 77

Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING].......................................................................................... 83

Other settings [FUNCTION] ................................................................................................................. 85

Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 95

Questions about Operations and Functions ...................................................................................... 101

Appendix .......................................................... 103

Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................. 104

Data Compatibility ............................................................................................................................. 106

Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................. 108

Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................. 110

CLP-295GP: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................................................................................. 111

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks (Optional) ............................................... 114

Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional)....................................................................................... 115

Specifications ..................................................................................................................................... 116

Index................................................................................................................................................... 117

Introduction

8 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Application Index

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation.

Listening

Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 20

“Playing the 50 Piano Preset Songs” on page 22

Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 20

Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Piano” ............. “Playing the 50 Piano Preset Songs” on page 22

Listening to my recorded performance

..................................“Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data” on page 56

Listening to songs in the USB storage device..................“Connecting to a USB storage device” on page 62

“Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data” on page 56

Playing

Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 28

Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ....................... “Changing the key [Transpose]” on page 85

Changing tonal color

Viewing the list of voices................................................................................ “Preset Voice List” on page 108

Simulating a concert hall...........................................................................................“[REVERB]” on page 30

Combining two voices ..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 31

Playing different sounds with left and right hands

...........................“Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 33

Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 29

Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 30

Making the sound three-dimensional .............. “Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING]” on page 83

Practicing

Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 24

Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 35

Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 36

“Turning part playback on and off” on page 59

Recording

Recording your performance ...................................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 36

Deleting or copying the recorded songs

.....................................“Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]” on page 45

Application Index

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 9

Introduction

Settings

Making detailed settings for recording and playback

.................................. “Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING]” on page 73

Making detailed settings for the metronome

......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 76

Making detailed settings for the voices

................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 77

Making detailed settings for the Clavinova............................... “Other settings [FUNCTION]” on page 85

Connecting the Clavinova to other devices

What is MIDI?......................................................................................................... “About MIDI” on page 60

Making detailed settings for MIDI

“Setting the MIDI transmit channel” – “Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI” on pages 91 – 92

Recording your performance ....................................................... “AUX OUT [L] [R] Pin jacks” on page 61

Raising the volume ........................................................................ “AUX OUT [L] [R] Pin jacks” on page 61

Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova.......... “AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] jacks” on page 61

Connecting to a USB storage device................................“Connecting to a USB storage device” on page 62

Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 65

Assembling

Assemble/disassemble the Clavinova....................... “CLP-295GP: Keyboard Stand Assembly” on page 111

Quick solution

What the Clavinova offers............................................................................... “Application Index” on page 8

“Panel Controls and Terminals” on page 10

Returning to the main screen.................................................................................“EXIT button” on page 13

Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting

................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 93

Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 95

If you have questions about operations and functions

............................................................................ “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 101

Troubleshooting............................................................................................. “Troubleshooting” on page 104

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation.

10 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Introduction

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

USB TO DEVICE

SELECT

8 @

% *

™

7 )

2 3 4 9

& ¡

6 !

(

£ § •

ª‚

∞

VOICE

Panel Controls and Terminals

The Yamaha CLP-295GP Clavinova offers unmatched sonic realism and exceptionally natural grand-piano type play-

ability, and features Yamaha’s original AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling technology for rich, authentic, musical

voices.

The special Natural Wood keyboard uses real wood white keys, to reproduce as closely as possible the experience of

playing an actual acoustic grand piano.

Thanks to these two keyboard types, you can use performance techniques previously possible only on grand

pianos—such as playing the same note successively and having sounds blend smoothly even without use of the

damper pedal, or playing the same key quickly and having perfect articulation without the sound cutting off unnatu-

rally. The remarkably authentic Grand Piano 1 voice on both instruments also features:

•Dynamic Sampling, using velocity-switched samples for extra realism;

•String Resonance (page 90), which recreates the rich resonance of piano strings;

•Sustain Sampling (page 90), which uses samples of the resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and

strings made when the damper pedal is pressed; and

•Keyoff Samples, which add the subtle, characteristic sounds produced when keys are released.

Top panel

Jacks & Terminals

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 11

Introduction

Panel Controls and Terminals

1 [POWER] switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16

2 [MASTER VOLUME] dial . . . . . . . . . page 17

Adjust the volume level using this dial.

3 [SONG BALANCE] slider . . . . . . . . . page 44

This lets you adjust the volume balance between the song

playback and the sound you are playing on the keyboard.

4 [DEMO] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 20

Demonstration playback is available for each voice.

5 [REPEAT] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25

For repeatedly playing back a single song or specifying a

range (in beats) within a song for repeated playback.

6 [RIGHT], [LEFT], [EXTRA PARTS] buttons

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .pages 24, 36, 41

For turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off as

required so you can practice the corresponding part (the

part that is turned off) on the keyboard.

7 [REC] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 36

For recording your keyboard performance.

8 [PLAY/PAUSE], [STOP] buttons

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .pages 22, 56

For playing back the preset songs, your recorded material

or commercially available music data, etc.

9 [SONG SELECT] button. . . . . . .pages 22, 56

For selecting a song to play back or edit.

)

[FILE/SONG SETTING] button . . . pages 45, 73

For saving recorded songs and managing song ﬁles. Also

lets you make detailed settings for song recording and

playback.

! METRONOME [ON/OFF], METRONOME

[SETTING] buttons . . . . . . .pages 35, 68, 76

For using the metronome functions.

@ TEMPO [UP][DOWN] buttons. . . . . page 35

For changing the tempo (speed) of the song and metro-

nome.

# A – D [–][+] buttons, Display. . . . . . page 12

$ [CONTRAST] knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17

For adjusting the display contrast.

% [EXIT] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13

Pressing this button returns to the main operation dis-

play (the one shown when the power is turned on).

^ Voice group buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . page 27

For choosing voice groups. Sixteen groups of voices,

including grand piano, are available. You can also com-

bine two voices and use them together.

& [VOICE SETTING] button . . . . .pages 69, 77

For making detailed changes to the voice sound and

effects.

* [SPLIT] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33

For playing different voices on the left- and right-hand

sections of the keyboard.

( [REVERB], [CHORUS] buttons . . . . . page 30

For adding reverb and chorus effects to the sound.

º BRILLIANCE [MELLOW][BRIGHT] buttons

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29

For adjusting the brightness of the sound.

¡ [iAFC SETTING] button . . . . . . pages 69, 83

When iAFC is engaged, the Clavinova will sound deeper,

more resonant, and more similar to the sound of an

actual acoustic instrument. You can turn the iAFC func-

tion on or off or make detailed settings for the iAFC.

™ [FUNCTION] button. . . . . . . . . pages 70, 85

This lets you make detailed settings, such as adjusting the

keyboard touch, making ﬁne adjustments to the pitch or

MIDI settings.

£ USB [TO DEVICE] terminals . . . . . . page 60

For connecting the instrument to a USB storage device,

allowing saving/loading of data to and from the con-

nected device. The instrument has two [TO DEVICE]

terminals, A and B, which can be speciﬁed using the

[SELECT] switch.

¢ Soft pedal (left), Sostenuto pedal (center),

Damper pedal (right) . . . . . . . . . . . page 28

For producing a range of expressive effects similar to

those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.

These pedals can also be assigned to various functions.

∞ [PHONES] jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17

For connecting a set of standard stereo headphones,

allowing private practice.

§ USB [TO HOST] terminal . . . . . . . . . page 60

For connecting the instrument to your computer, allow-

ing you to transfer MIDI data between the Clavinova and

the computer.

¶ MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] terminals . . page 60

For connecting external MIDI devices, allowing the use

of various MIDI functions.

• [AUX PEDAL] jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 60

For connecting an optional pedal, allowing convenient

foot control over one of a variety of assignable functions.

ª AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks . . . . . . . . . page 61

For connecting an external tone generator, allowing you

to play the sound of that device via the Clavinova’s inter-

nal sound system and speakers.

‚ AUX OUT [L][R] jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . page 61

For outputting the sound of the Clavinova to an external

audio system, or connecting it to another device (cassette

tape recorder, etc.) to record your performance.

In order to obtain the optimal results from iAFC, we rec-

ommend that you do the following.

•Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of

the Clavinova.

•Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on

the power of the Clavinova for the ﬁrst time, and after

each time you move the Clavinova (page 84).

12 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Introduction to the Controls

This instrument has many buttons and controls—so many that you may feel overwhelmed at ﬁrst. However,

once you understand the basic operations, you’ll ﬁnd the instrument is very easy to use.

Press the button corresponding to the function you want to use.

The buttons are the means of entrance to the functions.

For example, when you want to change a voice, you simply press one of the voice group buttons on the right

of the panel, or when you want to listen to a preset song, press the [SONG SELECT] button on the left of the

panel.

For the functions that are assigned to each button, see “Panel Controls and Terminals” on page 10.

When you press a button, related content or parameter is shown in the display. For example, when you press

a voice button, the voice name is shown, or when you press the [SONG SELECT] button, a song name is

shown on the display. After pressing a button, check the display for the indication.

Selecting items/parameters with the buttons on the side of the display.

Each function may have many items or parameters from which you can choose. To select an item or parame-

ter, press one of the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons. Each parameter in the display corresponds to the A [–][+]

– D [–][+] button next to it.

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

VOICE

NO YES

Grand Piano 1

NO YES

GrandPiano1 Harpsi.8'

Vibraphone WoodBass

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 13

Introduction

Introduction to the Controls

■ To reset the values or parameters, press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

If you’ve changed the parameter values or settings, you may wan to reset them to their normal condition. To do this,

simply press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

The TEMPO and BRILLIANCE buttons are the same shape as the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons. You can reset the

related values or parameters by simultaneously pressing buttons of this shape.

■ To execute or cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] button.

When a prompt is shown on the upper right of the display, press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] button to execute or can-

cel the operation.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from a function.

The [EXIT] button is the means to “leave” a function.

After you’ve used a function and want to exit from it, press the [EXIT] button.

NO YES

MetronomeVolume

100

NO YES

Save Overwrite?-->

M-001:NewSong001.MID

NO: cancel

YES: execute

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

CONTRAST

NO YES

EXIT

[EXIT] button

14 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Before Using the Clavinova

About the key cover

To open the key cover:

Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.

To close the key cover:

Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the

cover over the keys.

About the music rest

To raise the music rest:

1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go.

2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of

the music rest.

3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports.

To lower the music rest:

1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.

2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest).

3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down.

CAUTION

Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position.

When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music

rest until it is all the way down.

About the music braces

These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place.

CAUTION

Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be

careful to avoid catching ﬁngers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and the unit.

Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key

cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could

cause electric shock, short circuit, ﬁre or other serious damage to the instrument.

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid catching

your ﬁngers when opening or

closing the cover.

To open

To close

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 15

Introduction

About the Lid

One long stay and one short stay are provided on the lid. Use one of them to

open the lid to the desired angle.

To open the lid:

1. Raise and hold the right side of the lid (viewed from the

keyboard end of the instrument).

2. Raise the lid stay and carefully lower the lid so that the end

of the stay ﬁts into the recess in the lid.

To close the lid:

1. Hold the lid stay and carefully raise the lid.

2. Hold the lid in its raised position and lower the lid stay.

3. Carefully lower the lid.

CAUTION

•Make sure that the end of the stay ﬁts securely in the lid recess. If the stay is not properly seated in the recess, the

lid may fall, causing damage or injury.

•Be careful that you or others do not bump the stay while the lid is raised. The stay may be bumped out of the lid

recess causing the lid to fall.

•Be careful to avoid catching ﬁngers (yours or others, especially children's) when raising or lowering the lid.

Longer stay

Shorter stay

For the longer stay, use the

inner recess, and for the

shorter stay, use the outer

recess to support the lid.

NOTE

To turn on the iAFC (page 83), open the lid with the longer

stay using the inner recess.

When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay, the

iAFC will not be turned on.

16 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Before Using the Clavinova

Turning the power on

1. Connect the power cable.

First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of the cable

into the proper AC outlet on the wall.

In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

WARNING!

Make sure your CLP-295GP is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on

the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main key-

board unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the

wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!

Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-295GP. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced,

contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a ﬁre and shock hazard!

The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-295GP may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased.

(In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT mod-

ify the plug provided with the CLP-295GP. If the plug will not ﬁt the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualiﬁed electrician.

2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova.

Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on.

•The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the key-

board lights up.

Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova.

•The screen and the power indicator turn off.

(The shape of plug differs

depending on locale.)

(bottom surface)

1-21-1

NO YES

Grand Piano 1

When you turn on the power to the Clavinova,

a voice name appears on the screen.

Power indicator

If you close the key cover

without turning the power

off, the power indicator

remains lit, indicating that

the power is still on.

TIP

POWER

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 17

Introduction

Before Using the Clavinova

Adjusting the display contrast

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD.

Setting the volume

To adjust the volume, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial located at the left of the panel. Play the keyboard to

actually produce sound while you adjust the volume.

Using headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks.

When the headphones are plugged into either of the [PHONES]

jacks, the internal speaker system is automatically shut off.

Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo

headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of

headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.)

CAUTION

Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of time.

Doing so may cause hearing loss.

Using the Headphone Hanger

A headphone hanger is included in the CLP-295GP package so that

you can hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the head-

phone hanger using included two screws (4 × 10mm) as shown in

the ﬁgure.

CAUTION

Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Oth-

erwise, the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged.

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

CONTRAST:

difference between

brightness and darkness

TERMINOLOGY

Use this knob.

MASTER VOLUME

MAXMIN

CAUTION

Do not use the Clavinova at

a high volume level for a

long period of time, or your

hearing may be damaged.

The level

increases.

The level

decreases.

MASTER VOLUME:

The volume level of the entire keyboard sound

You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level, AUX [IN]

input level and the AUX [OUT] output level (when “Vari-

able” is selected in “AuxOutLevel” on page 91) using the

[MASTER VOLUME] dial.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Optional headphones

HPE-160 Yamaha headphones.

TIP

18 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment

The CLP-295GP features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the

speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound

when you open the lid with the longer stay. (page 15)

In order to optimize the iAFC effect, perform the automatic adjustment. (page 83)

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 19

Basic Operation

20 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Listening to the Demonstration

Tunes

For each voice group, the Clavinova contains one demo song that shows off the character of the voices.

This section explains how to listen to the demo songs for the voice groups listed below.

Demonstration tunes

The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts the original

compositions.

Procedure

Mode:

A mode is a status under which

you can execute a certain func-

tion. In demo mode, you can

play back demonstration tunes.

1. Engage the demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode.

The indicators of the voice group buttons will blink in succession.

Voice group Tunes Composer

GRAND PIANO1 “Eintritt” Waldszenen Op. 82 R.Schumann

HARPSICHORD Gavotte J.S.Bach

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

1 3

Voice group buttons

TERMINOLOGY

NO YES

VoiceDemo

SelectVoiceButton

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 21

Basic Operation

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes

To adjust the volume level of the

demo songs, use the [MASTER

VOLUME] dial.

To adjust the volume balance

between the song playback

and the sound you are playing

on the keyboard, use the

[SONG BALANCE] slider

(page 44).

You can also exit from demo

mode by pressing the [EXIT] or

[STOP] button.

2. Select a tune and start playback.

Press the voice group button for the demo song that you want

to hear.

The indicator of the voice group button you pressed will light, and the

demo song will begin playing. Subsequently, the demo songs will play

back consecutively from the upper left voice group button until you

stop the playback.

3. Stop the playback and exit from demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] button.

TIP

By holding down the [DEMO] button and pressing the A [+] but-

ton to get the “Piano Demo” display, you can hear the piano demo/

iAFC demo. The piano demo lets you compare the result of

enabling/disabling each sampling technology.

The iAFC demo lets you compare the result of turning iAFC on/off.

The demo songs are assigned to the voice group buttons as follows.

GRAND PIANO1..... Stereo Piano (stereo sampling)

GRAND PIANO2..... Mono Piano (mono sampling)

E.PIANO1 ............... mezzo piano (dynamic sampling, mezzo piano)

E.PIANO2 ............... mezzo forte (dynamic sampling, mezzo forte)

HARPSICHORD...... forte (dynamic sampling, forte)

E.CLAVICHORD ..... with Sustain (with sustain sampling)

VIBRAPHONE.........no Sustain (without sustain sampling)

GUITAR ..................with KeyOff (with key-off sampling)

CHURCH ORGAN.. no KeyOff (without key-off sampling)

JAZZ ORGAN......... with StringRes (with string resonance)

STRINGS ................ no StringRes (without string resonance)

CHOIR....................with iAFC

SYNTH.PAD............ no iAFC

22 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 22) or

use them for practice (page 24). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Piano” booklet that con-

tains the scores for 50 piano preset songs.

Playing the 50 piano preset songs

Procedure

Song:

On the Clavinova, performance

data is called a “Song.” This

includes demonstration tunes

and piano preset tunes.

1. Select a song.

If “PRESET” does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button

to call up “PRESET.” Press the C [–][+] buttons to select the

desired piano song from P-001 to P-050.

2. Play a preset song.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] button

TERMINOLOGY

Song select screen

NO YES

PRESET

BAR 001

P-001:Invention 1

The song number appears on the display.

• [-----: NewSong] is a blank

song provided for you to

record your performance

(page 36).

•You can repeatedly play

back a single song or spec-

ify a range (in beats) within

a song for repeated play-

back by using the [REPEAT]

button (page 25). Use the

“SongRepeat” parameter in

the [FILE/SONG SETTING]

menu to repeat playback of

all songs (page 73).

You can play the keyboard

along with the preset song

playback. You can change the

voice playing on the keyboard.

Use the D [–][+] buttons to

scroll through the song name,

if the name does not ﬁt in the

display.

TIP

NO YES

PRESET

BAR 015

P-001:Invention 1

the number of measures

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 23

Basic Operation

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

Adjusting the tempo

You can also use the D [–][+]

buttons to change the tempo.

Resetting the tempo

Whenever you select a new

preset song, the tempo is auto-

matically reset to the song’s

original value.

You can use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo

as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you

press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously.

Press either of the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen.

3. Stop the song playback.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

[PLAY/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.

Fast forward and rewind

You can perform the following operations in the song select screen:

•Use the B [–][+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward)

through the song while the song is played or stopped.

•Press the C [–] button during playback to start playback from the previous

song.

•Press the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next

song.

•Press the [STOP] button or simultaneously press the B [–][+] buttons dur-

ing playback or while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to

locate the top of the song.

Default screen:

The default screen is a voice

select screen (page 27) that

appears when you turn on the

power to the Clavinova.

4. Return to the default screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

TIP

NO YES

Tempo

TERMINOLOGY

24 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs

The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual parts. You can turn the left- and

right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off)

on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [RIGHT] and the left-hand part is played by [LEFT].

procedure

You can turn parts on or off,

even during playback.

1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice.

After you select a song to practice, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT]

button to turn off the corresponding part.

When you ﬁrst select a song, both [RIGHT] and [LEFT] indicators

light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press

one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button

indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted.

Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off.

2. Start playback and playing.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part

you just turned off.

Sync:

Synchronous; occurring at the

same time

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the key-

board (Sync Start)

You can cause playback to begin when you play the keyboard (Sync

Start).

Hold down the [STOP] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

The [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will blink, and the Clavinova will wait

for Sync Start.

Now when you play the keyboard, playback will begin at the same

moment.

If you press the [STOP] button while waiting, Sync Start will be can-

celled.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME VOICE

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 25

Basic Operation

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

3. Stop playback.

Resetting the part playback

Both parts are automatically

turned ON whenever you select

a new song.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle

of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by

pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press

the button.

Practicing with the Repeat Playback function and

the preset songs

The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a song or a speciﬁc range of measures in a

song. This is useful for repeated practicing of difﬁcult-to-play phrases.

Playing back a song repeatedly

procedure

You can repeatedly play back

all songs from the 50 preset

songs or from the USB storage

devices (page 73).

1. Enter the Repeat mode.

Select a song to practice, then press the [REPEAT] button.

2. Start Repeat playback.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

3. Exit the Repeat mode and return to the normal play

mode.

Press the [STOP] button to stop playback, then press the

[REPEAT] button.

TIP

26 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

Specifying a range of measures and playing them back repeatedly (A-B repeat)

Procedure

1. Select the desired song for practicing and play it.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

Specifying the repeat range

between point A and the end of

the song. Specifying only point

A results in repeat playback

between point A and the end of

the song.

When you select another song,

the speciﬁed range is automati-

cally cancelled and the repeat

function is turned off.

2. Specify the repeat range.

Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range

to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending

point (B).

After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the

range from point A to point B is played back repeatedly,

3. Cancel the speciﬁed range and return to the normal

play mode.

Press the [REPEAT] button.

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 27

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Selecting Voices

Procedure

Voice

On the Clavinova, a voice

means “tone” or “tonal color.”

You can also switch between

voices in the same group by

pressing a voice group button

repeatedly.

To learn characteristics of the

voices, listen to demo songs for

each voice group (page 20).

Refer to “Preset Voice List” on

page 108 for more information

on characteristics of each pre-

set voice.

You can control the loudness of

a voice by how hard you play

the keyboard, although different

playing styles (touch sensitivi-

ties) have little or no effect with

the sound of certain musical

instruments. Refer to “Preset

Voice List” on page 108.

XG is a major enhancement of

the GM System level 1 format,

and was developed by Yamaha

specially to provide more

voices and variations, as well

as greater expressive control

over voices and effects, and to

ensure compatibility of data

well into the future.

1. Select a voice group.

Press a voice group button.

2. Select a voice.

Use A [–][+] buttons to select a voice.

•For details on XG voices, refer to “XG voice list” (the separate data list booklet).

If you select XG

XG voices are categorized and included in separate folders. You can select the

XG voice group ﬁrst, then select the desired voice.

2-1. Simultaneously press the [–][+] screen buttons located

beside the XG voice name display, to access a screen where

you can select XG voices.

2-2. Use A [–][+] buttons to select the voice group.

2-3. Use C [–][+] buttons to select the desired voice.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

Voice group buttons

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Voice group Voice name Voice group Voice name

GRANDPIANO1

GrandPiano1

CHURCHORGAN

PipeOrganPrincipal

MellowPiano PipeOrganTutti

RockPiano PipeOrganFlute 1

HonkyTonkPiano PipeOrganFlute 2

GRANDPIANO2

GrandPiano2

JAZZORGAN

JazzOrgan

BrightPiano RotaryOrgan

E.PIANO1

E.Piano1 MellowOrgan

SynthPiano

STRINGS

Strings

E.PIANO2

E.Piano2 SynthStrings

Vintage E.Piano SlowStrings

HARPSICHORD

Harpsichord8'

CHOIR

Choir

Harpsichord8'+4' SlowChoir

E.CLAVICHORD

E.Clavichord Scat

Wah Clavi.

SYNTH.PAD

SynthPad 1

VIBRAPHONE

Vibraphone SynthPad 2

Marimba

WOOD BASS

WoodBass

Celesta Bass&Cymbal

GUITAR

NylonGuitar

E.BASS

ElectricBass

SteelGuitar FretlessBass

XG XGVoice

28 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Using the pedals

The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto

pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive

effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.

If the damper pedal doesn’t

work, or notes are sustained

even when the pedal is not

pressed, make sure that the

pedal cord is properly plugged

into the [PEDAL] jack on the

unit (see step 6 on page 113).

Also, make sure that the RPed-

alFunc parameter in the

“FUNCTION” menu is set to ON

(see page 87).

The threshold at which the Half

Pedal effect starts can be set

from the Half Pedal Point

parameter inthe Function menu

(page 89).

You can adjust the depth of the

resonance produced by the

“Sustain Samples” using the

Sustain Sampling Depth

parameter in the “FUNCTION”

menu. (See page 90.)

Damper (right) pedal

When you press the damper pedal, the notes

you play have a longer sustain.

When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the

damper pedal activates the instrument’s special

“Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the

unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s

soundboard and strings. A “half-pedal” effect

lets you use the damper pedal to create partial

sustain effects, depending on how far down

you press the pedal.

Sostenuto (center) pedal

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard

and press the sostenuto pedal while holding

the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the

pedal is held. All subsequent notes will not

sustain.

You can assign a function to

each pedal via the “RPedal-

Func”, “CPedalFunc”, and

“LPedalFunc” parameters in the

“FUNCTION” menu.

(See page 87.)

The center and left pedals can

also be assigned to song start/

stop operation (PLAY/PAUSE

function) via the “PedalPlay/

Pause” parameter in the

“FUNCTION” menu (on

page 89).

Soft pedal (left)

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes

played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are

already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you

play the target notes.)

With the Vibraphone, Jazz Organ and Mellow Organ voices, this pedal turns

vibrato on and off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 89.)

TIP

When you press the damper

pedal here, the notes you play

before you release the pedal

have a longer sustain.

When you press the sostenuto

pedal here while holding the

note(s), the notes will sustain

as long as you hold the pedal.

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 29

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Adding variation to the sound

[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS]

The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance,

Reverb, and Chorus.

[BRILLIANCE]

You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference.

Procedure

You can press BRILLIANCE

[MELLOW] [BRIGHT] buttons,

and then use D [–][+] buttons

to select the desired tonality.

Normal setting = Normal

Normal setting:

The “Normal setting” refers to

the default setting (factory set-

ting) obtained when you ﬁrst

turn on the power to the Clavi-

nova.

If you select [Bright1], [Bright2]

or [Bright3] as the type of bril-

liance, the volume level will

increase slightly. Under this

condition, if you raise the [MAS-

TER VOLUME] dial setting, the

sound may become distorted.

In this case, lower the volume

accordingly.

Press one of the BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/ [BRIGHT] buttons to

select the desired tonality.

Normal........... Standard tone

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

[REVERB] button

[CHORUS] button

BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] button

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Mellow3

Soft and mellow tone.

The sound becomes more mellow and rounder as the

number increases.

Mellow2

Mellow1

Bright1

Bright tone.

The sound becomes brighter as the number increases.

Bright2

Bright3

NO YES

Brilliance

Normal

30 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

[REVERB]

This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall.

Procedure

You can select a reverb type via

the Reverb Type parameter in

the “VOICE SETTING” menu,

and adjust the reverb depth for

the selected voice via the

Reverb Send parameter.

(See page 79.)

Normal setting = ON

Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb on

and off.

Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect

will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is

selected.

[CHORUS]

This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound.

Procedure

You can select a chorus type

via the Chorus Type parameter

in the “VOICE SETTING” menu,

and adjust the chorus depth for

the selected voice via the Cho-

rus Send parameter. You can

also turn chorus on or off via the

Chorus On Off parameter.

(See page 79.)

Normal Setting:

The normal chorus on/off set-

ting is different for each voice.

Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the chorus on

and off.

You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS]

ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off

parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 80). The [CHO-

RUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if

you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is

cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each

voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is auto-

matically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting.

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 31

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Combining two voices (Dual mode)

You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate

a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Exam-

ples (Dual and Split)” on page 110 for examples of effective voice combinations.

Dual mode using voices in different voice groups

Procedure

1. Enter Dual mode.

If you want to select Dual mode

for the left-hand area when the

entire keyboard is divided into

left and right areas (page 33),

hold down [SPLIT] button and

simultaneously press two voice

group buttons.

Refer to page 27 for details on

how to select XG voices.

Press two voice group buttons simultaneously.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–][+] buttons and B [–][+] buttons to select a voice.

The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 108

are called voice 1, and those listed in the bottom row are called

voice 2.

3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

Press any voice group button.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME VOICE

1 3

31 4

2 2

The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps

in Dual mode using voices from different group.

The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps

in Dual mode using voices from the same group.

Voice group buttons

TIP

NO YES

GrandPiano1 Vibraphone

Voice 1 Voice 2

32 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Dual mode using voices in the same voice group

Procedure

1. Select a voice group.

In normal play mode, press the desired voice group button.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–][+] buttons to select a voice.

If you want to select Dual mode

for the left-hand area when the

entire keyboard is divided into

left and right areas (page 33),

press D [–] [+] buttons.

3. Select another voice.

Use the B [–][+] buttons to select another voice in the same

voice group.

To use the identical voices, press the B [–][+] buttons once. To use dif-

ferent voices within the same voice group, press the B [–][+] buttons

repeatedly.

4. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

Press any voice group button.

TIP

NO YES

E.Piano1 SynthPiano

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 33

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two differ-

ent voices (Split mode)

Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another

with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the [WOOD BASS] or [E. BASS] voice with

the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on

page 110 for examples of effective voice combinations.

Procedure

1. Enter Split mode.

Press the [SPLIT] button.

2. Select a voice for the right hand.

Use the voice group buttons and the A [–] [+] buttons to select

the voice for the right-hand area.

Refer to page 27 for details on

how to select XG voice.

3. Select a voice for the left hand.

Hold down the [SPLIT] button, and press a voice group button

to select the voice group for the left-hand area.

Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a voice.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

2 3

1 3 4 53 4

Voice group buttons

TIP

34 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

A speciﬁed “split point” key is

included in the left-hand range.

The split point can also be set

by the [FUNCTION] parameter

[SplitPoint]. (page 87)

4. Specify the split point (the border between the right-

and left-hand range).

The normal setting of the split point is “F



2.”

To change the split point setting:

Hold down the [SPLIT] button, then use the D [–] [+] buttons to specify

the split point.

(Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT] button and play the key

you wish to assign as the split point.

Release the [SPLIT] button to return to the main screen.

5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode.

Press the [SPLIT] button.

TIP

You can use Dual (see page 31) in each area (right-hand and left-hand) of Split

mode.

Center “C”

NO YES

SplitPoint

F#2

NO YES

GrandPiano1 Harpsi.8'

Vibraphone WoodBass

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 35

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Using the metronome

The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for

practice.

Procedure

1. Start the metronome.

Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.

Adjusting the tempo

The default tempo is 120.

(If a song has been selected,

the song tempo is used.)

Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button.

You can set the time signature,

metronome volume, and metro-

nome tone using the METRO-

NOME [SETTING] button.

(See page 76.)

To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 5–500), use the TEMPO

[DOWN][UP] or the D [–][+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal

(default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons or the D [–] and [+]

buttons simultaneously.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen.

2. Stop the metronome.

Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

1 2

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] buttons

TIP

NO YES

Tempo

120

TIP

36 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

You can record your perfor-

mance (audio data) to a cas-

sette tape recorder or other

recording devices via the AUX

OUT connector. (see page 61.)

This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova

recording function.

You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova key-

board for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part,

then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand

part.

Since you can record up to sixteen parts separately, you could record the left-

and right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed perfor-

mance or ensemble song one by one to build a song.

Recording vs. Saving:

The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cas-

sette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and

a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the

saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However,

this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense.

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.

Refer to the “Message List” on page 95 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and

troubleshooting information.

Recording a New Song

There are two ways to record your performance: recording it quickly without specifying a recording part, or

recording several different parts to multiple parts. You can select whichever way best suits your purpose.

■ Recording a performance without specifying the recording part (page 37)

This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance without specifying

the recording parts—useful, for example, in recording solo piano pieces.

In this way, the performance is automatically recorded to part 1 (right part).

■ Recording a performance of several different parts (page 41)

This lets you record the right, left and extra parts separately. Since you can record the left part while playing

back the right, this is useful for recording both parts of a duet. Since you can record up to sixteen parts sepa-

rately, record the performance of each instrument part one by one and create fully orchestrated composi-

tions.

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

Part 1

Part 3

Part 4

Part 16

Part 2

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

[RIGHT] corresponds to part 1.

Record the right-hand part to [RIGHT].

[LEFT] corresponds to part 2.

Record the left-hand part to [LEFT].

[EXTRA PARTS] corresponds to part 3-16.

Record parts 3-16 in addition to part 1 and 2

when you are recording a song which has

many parts, such as a symphony orchestra.

Appropriate channels (parts) in

the song will automatically be

assigned to [RIGHT] and

[LEFT]. Therefore, [RIGHT] may

be assigned to a part other

than Part 1, or [LEFT] to a part

other than Part 2.

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 37

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

Recording a performance without specifying the

recording part

Procedure

If you select a song other than “-

----:NewSong” and record on a

part that already has data, the

existing data on the part will be

lost.

1. Select “NewSong” for recording.

Press the [REC] and [STOP] buttons simultaneously.

Set the tempo in Step 3.

See page 44 for more informa-

tion on recording in Dual/Split

mode.

2. Select a voice.

Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 27).

Set the other parameters, such as reverb, chorus and Song Balance.

Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to set the volume level to suit

your preference. You can also use the dial to adjust the level during

playback.

After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not

appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button once to return to the

“NewSong” screen.

3. Engage the record mode.

Press the [REC] button.

The [REC] and [RIGHT] indicators ﬂash in red.

(To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP]

button.)

Set the tempo, if necessary.

If this record standby screen does not appear, press the [SONG

SELECT] button once.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

1 3

4 5

TIP

NO YES

------------- BAR 001

-----:NewSong

“NewSong” screen

TIP

NO YES

SongRecording BAR 001

-----:NewSong

Record standby screen

38 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

Using the metronome

You can record data while

using the metronome. To do

this, turn the metronome on

before step 4. The metronome

is not recorded.

To stop recording in the middle

of a song, press the [PLAY/

PAUSE] button. To resume

recording, press the [PLAY/

PAUSE] button again or play a

note on the keyboard.

4. Start and stop recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on

the keyboard.

(Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording.

The recording screen displays the current measure number.

When you press the [REC] but-

ton, recording pauses. To return

the location to the start of the

song, press the [REC] button,

again.

Rename songs

The recorded songs are named

automatically, but you can

rename songs as you like

(page 50).

To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova

locates the top of the song.

As soon as recording is stopped, the song is automatically saved to

Storage memory (page 45). When saving is completed, the Storage

memory screen appears.

5. Play back the recorded performance.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded per-

formance.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

[PLAY/PAUSE] button.

TIP

NO YES

SongRecording BAR 012

-----:NewSong

Record screen

Measure number in recording

TIP

NO YES

SAVE Executing

-----:NewSong001.MID

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 39

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

Re-recording a song partially

This section explains how to record part of a song again.

Procedure

1. Select a recording method.

1-1 Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button.

1-2 Press the A [–][+] buttons to display “RecStart” or “RecEnd.”

1-3 Press the D [–][+] buttons to specify how the recording should

start and end.

Starting methods:

Normal: The existing data will be erased after re-recording starts.

FirstKeyOn: Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note

will not be erased.

Ending methods:

Replace: The data after the point you stop recording will also be erased.

PunchOut: The data after the point you stop recording will remain.

2. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish

to re-record.

Use the B [–][+] buttons while the playback screen is displayed

to move through the measures or play back the recording and

press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to

the beginning of the part you wish to re-record.

If the playback screen is not displayed, press the [SONG SELECT]

button once.

3. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 2 on page 37 if you wish to change the previous

settings.

NO YES

MEMORY BAR 009

M-001:NewSong001.MID

40 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

4. Engage record mode.

Press the [REC] button.

To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP]

button. After pressing the [REC] button again or the [STOP] button

when “RecStart” is set to “Normal” (page 39), “Overwrite?” is shown

in the display. To cancel this and not overwrite, press the B [– (NO)]

button.

5. Start and stop recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on

the keyboard.

(Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the

top of the song.

6. Save the recorded songs.

When you stop recording, the display prompts you whether you

want to overwrite the song or not. Press the B [+ (YES)] button

to overwrite the song.

To cancel overwriting, press the B [– (NO)] button.

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 41

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

Recording a performance of several different parts

Procedure

Set the tempo in Step 2.

See page 44 for more informa-

tion on recording in Dual/Split

mode.

1. Select “New Song” and a voice for recording.

Follow the same operation steps as in “Recording a performance with-

out specifying the recording part” above. Refer to steps 1-2 on

page 37.

2. Specify the recording parts and engage the record

mode.

Record to the right (part 1) or left (part 2) part:

Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [RIGHT]/[LEFT] but-

ton.

Record to the extra parts (part 3-16):

Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button and press the A [–][+] button to

display “RecExtraPartsCh.” Press the D [–][+] buttons to specify a recording

part. The speciﬁed part is assigned to the [EXTRA PARTS] button.

After specifying the recorded part to the [EXTRA PARTS] button, press and

hold down the [REC] button and press the [EXTRA PARTS] button.

The [REC] and speciﬁed part indicators ﬂash in red.

(To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] but-

ton.)

Set the tempo, if necessary.

If this record standby screen does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT]

button once.

If you don’t want to hear the right/left part while you record, press the

[RIGHT]/[LEFT] button so that its indicator is turned off.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

1 2

2 3 2

TIP

NO YES

SongRecording BAR 001

-----:NewSong

Record standby screen

42 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

3. Start and stop recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on

the keyboard.

(Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the

top of the song.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova

locates the top of the song.

As soon as recording is stopped, the song is automatically saved to

Storage memory (page 45). When saving is completed, the Storage

memory screen appears.

Other recording techniques

Adding data to or recording over an existing song

The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank

“-----: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs

[P-001—P-050], commercially-available music data <see page 59>, or your old recorded performances <see

page 45>).

Procedure

If you record on a part that

already has data, the existing

data on the part will be lost.

1. Select a song to be recorded over.

To select a preset song, press the [SONG SELECT] button, then press

the A [–][+] buttons to display “PRESET.” To select a song, press the C

[–][+] buttons.

To select a song from commercially available music data or from

already-recorded data, press the A [–][+] buttons to display “MEM-

ORY” or “USB1” in the Song Select screen and press the C [–][+] but-

tons.

To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording

a performance without specifying the recording part” from pages 37

to 36.

When you record over a preset song, the song is automatically saved

to Storage memory (page 45) when the recording stopped.

When you record over a song of commercially available music data or

of already-recorded data, the display prompts you whether you want

to overwrite the song or not (when recording is stopped). Press the B

[+ (YES)] button to overwrite the song.

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 43

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

Changing a voice or tempo after recording

You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo.

You can also change these elements in the middle of a song.

Procedure

Before changing a voice or

tempo, set the starting method

to “Normal.” (page 39)

When the starting method is set

to “FirstKeyOn,” you cannot

change a voice or tempo.

Refer to “Questions about

Operations and Functions” on

page 101 for information on the

settings that can be changed

here.

Change the tempo in Step 4.

The panel settings on Step 3

will be saved in memory and

you will not be able to restore

the previous settings. Proceed

with caution.

1. Select a song you wish to change (page 42).

2. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the

song, specify the measure to change by using the

B [–][+] buttons while the playback screen is displayed

or by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a

point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you

wish to re-record.

3. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.).

For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to

E. Piano2, use the voice group buttons and the A [–][+] buttons to

select E.Piano2.

When the setting is complete, press the [SONG SELECT] button once

to return to the song select screen.

4. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the

part to change.

The indicator for the selected part lights up in red.

Change the tempo setting now, if necessary.

At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [PLAY/PAUSE]

button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data.

5. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode.

When you exit record mode, the display prompts you whether you

want to overwrite the song or not. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to

overwrite the song.

TIP

CAUTION

44 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance

[SONG BALANCE]

While recording multiple parts one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the playback of the

recorded parts and your current performance.

Procedure

Some commercially-available

music data contains extremely

high volumes. When using such

data, please adjust the song

balance.

1. Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider to the left or right

to make adjustments.

Recording in Dual or Split mode

When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate part. The following

table shows how parts are assigned to each voice.

CAUTION

When you record multiple parts one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see page 42), the

existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution.

In the following example, RIGHT, LEFT, and EXTRA PARTS n have been selected for recording.

Note: Part n = Part 3 – Part 16

If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, Parts 1, 2, and 3 are used.

Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded.

TIP

SONG BALANCE

SONG KEYBOARD

The song playback

volume will be lower.

Your playing volume

will be lower.

Parts assigned for

recording

Dual Split Split+Dual

RIGHT LEFT EXTRA

PART n

RIGHT LEFT EXTRA

PART n

RIGHT LEFT EXTRA

PART n

↓ ↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓

Parts

used for

record-

ing

MAIN

(voice 1)

Part 1 Part 2 Part n Part 1 Part n Part 1 Part n

LEFT

(voice 1)

–Part 2 Part n+1 Part 2 Part n+1

MAIN

(voice 2)

Part 3 Part 4 Part n+2 – Part 3 Part n+2

LEFT

(voice 2)

––Part 4Part n+3

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 45

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song

ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

File

A ﬁle contains a group of data.

On the Clavinova, a song ﬁle

includes song data and a song

number.

Memory

Memory is a location inside the

Clavinova in which you can

save and edit data.

Character code

Type of characters

Please note that the copy fea-

tures are intended for your per-

sonal use only.

File screens (accessed via the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button) enables you to

handle ﬁles (e.g., save, delete and rename recorded songs), copy and format

medias and change characters on the screen.

The following parameters are provided for these operations:

Clavinova memory

The Clavinova has the following three types of memory:

• Current memory:

This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit

the currently-selected song before playback or recording.

• Preset song memory:

This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs.

• Storage memory:

This memory area enables you to save recorded songs or song data loaded

from USB storage device.

When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song

memory, Storage memory, or USB storage device, into Current memory.

You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn

off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Stor-

age memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are

lost. However, recorded songs are automatically saved to Storage memory

from Current memory.

In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is

referred to as a “Current song,” a song in Storage memory is a “Memory

song,” and a song on a USB storage device is an “External song.”

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Settings

Parameter

name

Reference

page

Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device Save 48

Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage

memory or from a USB storage device

Delete 49

Renaming ﬁles Rename 50

Copying ﬁles

Copy 51

Moving ﬁles

Move 53

Making folders (directories) in the USB storage

device

MakeDir 54

Formatting a USB storage device Format 54

Automatically selecting a song in storage media SongAutoOpen 55

Changing the type of characters on screen CharacterCode 55

Clavinova

Storage memory

Preset song

memory

USB storage device

Current memory

46 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Song types

This instrument handles various types of songs. Letters and song numbers are

displayed to the left of the song name. The letters indicate the different song

types as follows:

P ..................Preset songs

M.................Memory songs

MP...............Protected songs such as preset songs saved to Storage memory, or

Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft

songs in the Storage memory.

MS, Ms ........Yamaha-protection-formatted songs in the Storage memory.

U1................External song

U1P .............External songs such as Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) songs or

Disklavier Piano Soft songs in a USB storage device.

U1S, U1s .....Yamaha-protection-formatted songs in a USB storage device.

U1 song with the “.SME” exten-

sion can only be deleted —

cannot execute other ﬁle opera-

tions at left.

Limitation of ﬁle operations

Ø: Yes ˛: No

*1 Only to Storage memory

*2 Only MP songs

*3 Only between Storage memory and USB storage memory

TIP

Song types

PM, U1MP, U1P

MS, Ms, U1S,

U1s

Save Ø

ØØ

Delete ˛ØØ

Rename ˛ØØ

Copy Ø

ØØ

Move ˛Ø˛Ø

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 47

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Basic ﬁle operation

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.

Refer to the “Message List” on page 95 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take.

Procedure

If a folder is displayed for an

External song, the[ / ] indica-

tor is displayed in the lower

right of the screen. In this case,

you can use the D [+] button to

open the folder. Press the D [–]

button to return to the previous

(upper) level.

Avoid frequently turning the

power on/off to the USB storage

device, or connecting/discon-

necting the cable too often.

Doing so may result in the oper-

ation of the instrument “freez-

ing” or hanging up. While the

instrument is accessing data

(such as in the Save, Copy and

Delete operations), do NOT

unplug the USB cable, do NOT

remove the media from the

device, and do NOT turn the

power off to either device.

Doing so may corrupt the data

on either or both devices.

1. Prepare for handling ﬁle(s).

Prepare for handling ﬁles as follows.

To use “Save,” “Rename,” “Copy” or “Move”:

Select a song via the [SONG SELECT] button.

To use “MakeDir”:

Select the USB storage device via the [SONG SELECT] button.

To use “Delete,” “Format,” “SongAutoOpen” or “CharacterCode”:

No need to perform any operations in this step.

2. Access the File/Song Setting menu.

Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button.

To close the File/Song Setting menu, press the [EXIT] button once or

twice.

3. Select the desired parameter.

Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] or A [–][+] buttons repeatedly to

display the desired item.

4. Set the parameter or execute the command.

Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)], C [–][+], D [–][+] buttons.

For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corre-

sponding section below.

5. Close the File/Song Setting menu.

Press the [EXIT] button.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

2 3 5

13 4

TIP

→

CAUTION

NO YES

Save Selected?-->

M-002:NewSong002.MID /-

“Overwrite?→”: Do you wish to

overwrite the song?

“Execute?→”: Do you wish to

execute the operation?

“Sure?→”: Are you sure?

“Executing”: The Clavinova is

executing the operation.

“Completed”: The operation is

complete.

TERMINOLOGY

48 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save]

Recorded songs are automatically saved to Storage memory from Current memory, so normally you won’t

need to save songs using this function. However, if a “MemoryFull” message or “SystemLimit” message

appear, save the song to another device using this function.

Do not turn off the power before the save operation is completed. If you turn off the power to the Clavinova before the save operation

is completed, the recorded song will be lost.

Procedure

If a folder is displayed for an

External song, the[ / ] indica-

tor is displayed in the lower

right of the screen. In this case,

you can use the D [+] button to

open the folder. Press the D [–]

button to return to the previous

(upper) level.

See page 47 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4.

4-1 Select a save destination.

Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and press the C

[–][+] buttons to select a save destination (Storage memory or USB

storage device). After selecting a save destination, press the B [+

(YES)] button to ﬁx it. Then press the B [+ (YES)] button to display

“Execute?

→.”

4-2 Name the song.

To move the cursor (small underline), use the C [–][+] buttons.

To insert a space, press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

To select a character at the cursor, use the D [–][+] buttons.

To delete a character, press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

You can use up to 46 one-byte or 23 two-byte characters for a song

name. If the name is longer than the screen, use the C [–][+] buttons

to move the cursor and scroll the name.

4-3 Execute the operation.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

The song is automatically numbered.

If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavi-

nova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them.

NO YES

Save Selected?-->

M-001:NewSong001.MID /-

CAUTION

TIP

→

You can change the type of

characters on the screen using

the “CharacterCode” parame-

ter.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the media while “Execut-

ing” is shown in the display.

TIP

CAUTION

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 49

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory

or from a USB storage device ... [Delete]

This deletes a song from Storage memory or from a USB storage device. It is

not possible to delete a preset song or current song.

Procedure

After you delete a song, the

Clavinova automatically

updates the song numbers.

When you delete a folder, all ﬁles

within that folder will be deleted.

If a folder is displayed for an

External song, the[ / ] indica-

tor is displayed in the lower

right of the screen. In this case,

you can use the D [+] button to

open the folder. Press the D [–]

button to return to the previous

(upper) level.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the media while “Execut-

ing” is shown in the display.

See page 47 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4.

4-1 Press the C [–][+] buttons to select a song to delete.

To select Storage memory or USB storage device:

Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?

→” and press the C

[–][+] buttons to select Storage memory or USB storage device. Then,

press the B [+ (YES)] button or D [+] button to display the content of

the Storage memory or USB storage device and select a song by press-

ing the C [–][+] buttons.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-

cute?

→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

NO YES

Delete Execute?-->

U1-001:NewSong001 /-

TIP

→

CAUTION

50 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Renaming ﬁles ... [Rename]

You can change a song’s title except for the preset songs and [-----: NewSong].

Procedure

Do not turn off the power or

eject the media while “Execut-

ing” is shown in the display.

To rename folders

To rename a folder, select

“Rename” then select the folder

by pressing the [SONG

SELECT] button and the C [–]

[+] buttons. (The folder name is

shown after “DIR:.”) To select

another level in this display,

press the D [–][+] buttons.

(Other levels can be selected

when “ / ” is shown in the dis-

play.) After that, select

“Rename” again and rename

the folder.

After you rename a song, the

Clavinova sorts songs alpha-

betically and renumbers them.

See page 47 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4.

4. Name the song as described in the “Save” section

(page 48).

CAUTION

TIP

→

TIP

NO YES

Rename Execute?-->

M-001:NewSong001

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 51

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Copying ﬁles ... [Copy]

Please note that the copy fea-

tures are intended for your per-

sonal use only.

Root:

The highest level of a hierarchi-

cal structure. This indicates an

area which does not belong to

a folder.

You can copy songs. However, you cannot copy ﬁles to the same root direc-

tory or same folder.

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

Copy operation

NO YES

Copy Execute?-->

U1-001:NewaSong001 /-

You can copy ﬁles to other memory location.

File A

File B

Storage memory

Can be copied.

USB storage device

You can copy ﬁles to a folder but not on the same root directory.

File A

File B

File A

Folder

Cannot be copied.

Can be copied.

USB storage device

52 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Procedure

See page 47 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4.

4-1 When you copy a song to/from a USB storage device,

make sure that a USB storage device is connected to

the instrument.

4-2 Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→”

and press the C [–][+] buttons to select a copy destina-

tion (Storage memory or USB storage device). After

selecting a copy destination, press the B [+ (YES)] but-

ton to ﬁx it.

4-3 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-

cute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

Protected songs cannot be

copied.

Please note that the copy fea-

tures are intended for your per-

sonal use only.

You cannot copy a folder.

If a folder is displayed for an

External song, the [ / ] indi-

cator is displayed in the lower

right of the screen. In this

case, you can use the D [+]

button to open the folder.

Press the D [–] button to return

to the previous (upper) level.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the media while “Execut-

ing” is shown in the display.

TIP

→

CAUTION

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 53

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Moving ﬁles ... [Move]

You can move (cut and paste) songs.

Procedure

See page 47 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for step 4.

4-1 When you move a song to/from a USB storage device,

make sure that a USB storage device is connected to

the instrument.

4-2 Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→”

and press the C [–][+] buttons to select a move desti-

nation (Storage memory or USB storage device). After

selecting a move destination, press the B [+ (YES)]

button to ﬁx it.

4-3 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-

cute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

NO YES

Move Execute?-->

U1-001:NewSong001 /-

Preset songs and some pro-

tected songs cannot be

moved.

You cannot move a folder.

If a folder is displayed for an

External song, the [ / ] indi-

cator is displayed in the lower

right of the screen. In this

case, you can use the D [+]

button to open the folder.

Press the D [–] button to return

to the previous (upper) level.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the media while “Execut-

ing” is shown in the display.

TIP

→

CAUTION

54 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Making folders in the USB storage device ... [MakeDir]

You can create folders (directories) on the USB storage device to organize songs. This instrument enables you

to create folders only in the USB storage device—not in the Preset song memory and Storage memory.

Procedure

See page 47 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for step 4.

4-1 Follow the steps “Saving recorded songs to a USB stor-

age device” on page 48 to name the folder.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-

cute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

The folder is created in the root directory in the USB1 (indicated by

“U1” in this display) device.

Formatting a USB storage device ... [Format]

You can format media so that it can be used with the Clavinova.

Procedure

See page 47 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed

procedure for step 4.

4-1 If some USB storage devices are recognized by the

instrument, press the C [–][+] buttons to select a

device.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-

cute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

NO YES

MakeDir Execute?-->

U1 :NewDir_

Do not turn off the power or eject

the media while “Executing” is

shown in the display.

To make a folder for the

selected drive or level

To make a folder for the selected

drive or level, select “MakeDir”

then select “USB” by pressing

the [SONG SELECT] button. In

this display, press the A [–][+]

button to select another drive.

Press the D [–][+] button to

select another level. After that,

select “MakeDir” again and

make a folder, following step 4 at

left.

Root:

The highest level of a hierarchi-

cal structure. This indicates an

area which does not belong to a

folder.

CAUTION

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

NO YES

Format Execute?-->

USB1

Do not turn off the power or

eject the media while “Execut-

ing” is shown in the display.

For a list of devices whose

compatibility has been con-

ﬁrmed by Yamaha, visit the fol-

lowing web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/CLP-

295GP/

CAUTION

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 55

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Automatically selecting a song in storage media ...

[SongAutoOpen]

Specify whether a song (not contain in a folder) which does not contain to a

folder will automatically be opened when you insert the media.

Procedure

See page 47 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for step 4.

4 Use D [–][+] button to select ON or OFF.

Changing the type of characters on screen

... [CharacterCode]

You can change the type of characters that appear on screen.

The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.”

Options: International, Japanese

Character list

International

Japanese

NO YES

SongAutoOpen

When a USB storage device is

connected to the instrument, a

song in the device will not

automatically open. A song is

automatically opened only

when media is inserted to a

drive. Therefore, this function

cannot be used for devices

which do not use removable

media — such as USB ﬂash

memory or hard disk drive.

TIP

NO YES

CharacterCode

Japanese

56 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Playing Back Recorded Songs and

Commercially-available Music Data

See page 59 for information on

the types of song data that can

be played on the Clavinova.

Change the Clavinova’s char-

acter type ([CharacterCode])

as appropriate for the selected

song (page 55).

You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 36) as well

as commercially-available music data. You can also play the keyboard along

with the playback.

Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument,

and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200–300KB,

however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song.

Playing back a song

If you want to play back an External song on this instrument, connect the USB storage device and insert the

appropriate media into the device.

Procedure

1. Display the song select screen.

Press the [SONG SELECT] button.

2. Select the desired song.

TIP

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

34 5

NO YES

PRESET Bar 001

P-001:Invention 1

Song select screen

You can enjoy ensemble perfor-

mance by yourself. Record the

parts for a four-handed song or a

piano duet, then play the recorded

part while playing the other part on

the keyboard.

You can repeat playback a single

song via the [Repeat] button

(page 25) or repeat playback all

songs by using the “SongRepeat”

function (page 73).

If a folder is displayed for an Exter-

nal song, the [ / ] indicator is dis-

played in the lower right of the

screen. In this case, you can use

the D [+] button to open the folder.

Press the D [–] button to return to

the previous (upper) level.

If the song name extends beyond

what can be displayed in the

screen, you can press the D [+]

button to move toward the right in

steps of one character. Press the

D [–] button to move back to the

left in steps of one character.

TIP

→

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 57

Basic Operation

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

2-1 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the song type:

“PRESET,” “MEMORY,” or “USB1.”

PRESET ......Stands for Preset song memory. This memory contains 50

piano preset songs.

MEMORY...Stands for Storage memory. This memory contains recorded

songs or copied songs. “MEMORY” is not displayed when this

memory does not contain any songs.

USB1...........Stands for USB storage device. This device contains commer-

cially available song data, etc. “USB1” is not displayed when

the USB storage device is not connected to the instrument.

When several USB storage devices are recognized to the instru-

ment, numbers are added after “USB,” like “USB1,” “USB2”...

The numbers are not ﬁxed and may change according to the

order in which the devices are connected and disconnected.

2-2 Use the C [–][+] or [SONG SELECT] button to select a

song.

Letters (page 46) and song numbers are displayed on the left of the

song names.

3. Start playback.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the

keyboard (Sync Start)

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is

called the “Sync Start” function.

To enter Sync Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button

and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator ﬂashes.

Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.

To cancel the Sync Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavi-

nova is in Sync Start standby mode.

You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by

using the B [–][+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is

playing or stopped.

You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You

can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by select-

ing the voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the

playback parts and your current performance using the [SONG BALANCE]

slider. (See page 44.)

Press the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen.

NO YES

USB1 Bar 005

U1-001:Song001.MID

The bar number in playback

Bar: measure

You can play the metronome

along with the song playback.

When you stop playback, the

metronome is also stopped.

Press the C [+] button during

playback to start playback

from the next song. Press the

C [–] button during playback to

start playback from the previ-

ous song.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

58 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

Adjusting the tempo

You can use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons to adjust the playback

tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s

original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simul-

taneously.

Press the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen.

4. Stop playback.

When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

[PLAY/PAUSE] button. Playback pauses when you press the button.

5. Return to the main screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 59

Basic Operation

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

Turning part playback on and off

You can practice a part or

phrase using the “SongRepeat

(page 73)” and “PhraseMark

(page 73)” parameters in the

“FILE/SONG SETTING” menu.

Appropriate channels (parts) in

the song will automatically be

assigned to [RIGHT] and

[LEFT]. Therefore, [RIGHT] may

be assigned to a part other

than Part 1, or [LEFT] to a part

other than Part 2.

While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these part buttons turn

off the indicators, and the data on those parts will not be played. Pressing the

part buttons toggles part playback on and off. You can play the part that is

turned off.

Supported song data type

Data formats that can be played on the CLP-295GP

The Clavinova CLP-295GP plays song data in the following formats:

Sequence format:

A structured method for record-

ing performance data.

Sequence format

SMF (Standard MIDI File) formats 0 and 1

ESEQ

Performance data recorded on the CLP-295GP is saved as SMF format

Voice arrangement format:

A structured method for num-

bering the voices for assign-

ment.

This instrument can play GS

format songs. However, the

voices may not be completely

the same as used in the origi-

nal.

Vo ice arrangement format

XG voice arrangement

GM system level 1 voice arrangement

GM system level 2 voice arrangement

DOC voice arrangement

Performance data recorded with preset XG voices on the CLP-295GP

can be played on other XG-compatible instruments.

See the separate “Data List” for the XG voice list.

Disk format:

A structured method for writing

data to disk.

Floppy disk format

3.5-inch 2DD disks in the MS-DOS 720KB format

3.5-inch 2HD disks in the MS-DOS 1.44MB format

Refer to “Data compatibility” on page 106 for more information on formats.

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

60 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Connections

Connectors

CAUTION

Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before

turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or

damage to the components may occur.

There are two different types of

USB terminals on the instru-

ment: USB [TO DEVICE] and

USB [TO HOST]. Take care not

to confuse the two terminals

and the corresponding cable

connectors. Be careful to con-

nect the proper plug in the

proper direction.

MIDI performance data and

commands are transferred in

the form of numeric values.

Since MIDI data that can be

transmitted or received varies

depending on the type of MIDI

device, check the “MIDI Imple-

mentation Chart” to ﬁnd out

what MIDI data and commands

your devices can transmit or

receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI

Implementation Chart appears

on the separate Data List.

Connect or disconnect the

pedal when the power is off.

1 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal (A/B)

This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices.

Refer to “Connecting to a USB storage device” on page 62.

2 USB [TO HOST] terminal

This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Con-

necting a personal computer” on page 65 for more information.

3 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] terminals

Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors.

MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data.

MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data.

MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] terminal as it is.

4 [AUX PEDAL] jack

A separately sold FC7 foot controller or FC4/FC5 foot switch can be con-

nected to this jack. By using an FC7 you can control the volume while playing

to add expression to your performance, or control various other functions. By

using an FC4/FC5, you can switch various selected functions on/off. To select

the function that will be controlled, use the [FUNCTION] parameter [Aux-

Pedal] (page 88). The [PLAY/PAUSE] function can also be assigned to a foot

switch (page 89).

USB TO DEVICE

SELECT

TO DEVICE B

TO HOST

USB

AUX OUT

AUX IN

MIDI

AUX PEDAL

IN OUT

THRU

L/L+R

on the left of the panel

at front

TIP

CAUTION

About MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data trans-

mission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands

between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a

connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a con-

nected MIDI device or computer.

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 61

Basic Operation

Connections

The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOL-

UME] dial setting affects the

input signal from the AUX IN

jacks, but the [REVERB], [CHO-

RUS], and BRILLIANCE [MEL-

LOW] [BRIGHT] (page 29)

settings do not.

If you connect the Clavinova to

a monaural device, use only the

AUX IN [L/L+R] jack.

Use audio cables and adaptor

plugs with no resistance.

5 AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] jacks

The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks,

allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavi-

nova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connec-

tion.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, ﬁrst

turn on the power to the external device, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this

order when you turn the power off.

When the sound from the AUX

OUT jacks is routed to the AUX

IN jacks, the input sound will be

output from the speaker of the

CLP. The output sound may be

excessively loud and may

cause noise.

6 AUX OUT [L] [R] Pin jacks

These jacks let you connect the Clavinova to your stereo system etc. to play at

higher volumes, or connect a cassette recorder etc. to record your playing. Use

audio cables to make connections as shown in the diagram.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio sys-

tem, ﬁrst turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system.

Reverse this order when you turn the power off.

When “AuxOutLevel (page 91)” is set to “Fixed,” the sound is output to the

external device at a ﬁxed level and the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] set-

ting will not affect the sound.

When “AuxOutLevel (page 91)” is set to “Variable,” the Clavinova’s [MASTER

VOLUME] setting will affect the sound that is output from AUX OUT.

TIP

AUX IN

RL L+R

Clavinova

AUX IN

AUX OUT

Tone Generator

Plug shape depends on the device.

audio cable

phone plug

(standard)

TIP

AUX OUT

Clavinova

AUX INAUX OUT

audio cable

RCA pin plug

Stereo

RCA pin plug

62 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Connections

Connecting to a USB storage device

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve

created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device.

Compatible USB storage devices

CD-ROM drive

Although CD-R/RW drives can

be used to read data to the

instrument, they cannot be

used for saving data.

Do not use a non-ID SmartMe-

dia card.

Number of USB storage

devices

Two USB storage devices can

be connected to one USB [TO

DEVICE] terminal using a hub

device. This instrument can

recognize up to four drives in

one USB storage device.

About USB hub

If you are connecting two

devices at the same time, use a

USB hub device. The USB hub

must be self-powered (with its

own power source) and the

power must be on. Only one

USB hub can be used. If an

error message appears while

using the USB hub, disconnect

the hub from the instrument,

then turn on the power of the

instrument and re-connect the

USB hub.

Optional Floppy Disk Drive

Yamaha UD-FD01

Up to two USB storage devices, such as a ﬂoppy disk drive, hard disk drive,

CD-ROM drive, ﬂash memory reader/writer, etc., can be connected to the

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub.) Other USB

devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used.

CAUTION

Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connect-

ing/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the

instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data

(such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB

cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power

off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices.

TIP

The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available

USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage

devices that you purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices, please

consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list

at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice, or visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/CLP-295GP/

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 63

Basic Operation

Connections

Connection to a USB storage device

If you connect USB storage

devices to both USB [TO

DEVICE] terminals, the devices

may not operate properly.

This instrument has two USB [TO DEVICE] terminals; one on the left of the

panel and one on the terminal at the front.

Both are the same terminal; however, both cannot be used at the same time.

Use the [SELECT] switch to select the desired terminal. Switching to “A”

selects the terminal on the left of the panel, while switching to “B” selects the

terminal panel at the front.

CAUTION

While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations),

do NOT use the [SELECT] switch. Doing so may corrupt the media or data.

Formatting USB storage media

When you execute a ﬁle-related operation with a connected USB storage

device, a message may appear indicating the device/media is unformatted.

If so, execute the Format operation (page 54).

CAUTION

The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Proceed with caution.

To display the data in the USB storage device

Though the instrument supports

the USB 1.1 standard, you can

connect and use a USB 2.0

storage device with the instru-

ment. However, note that the

transfer speed is that of USB

1.1.

To view the data of the USB storage device on the CLP display, press the

[SONG SELECT] button to engage song selection mode or press the [FILE/

SONG SETTING] button to engage ﬁle/song setting mode. If you try to

engage these modes before connecting the USB storage device, press the

[EXIT] button to exit the mode and re-engage the mode.

TIP

To protect your data (write-protect):

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-pro-

tect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB

storage device, make sure to disable write-protect.

USB TO DEVICE

SELECT

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal A

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal B

Select the desired terminal

TIP

64 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Connections

Backing up your data to a computer

■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer

Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard

disk of your computer, then archive and organize the ﬁles as desired. Simply

reconnect the device as shown below.

■ Copying ﬁles from a computer hard disk to a USB storage

device

Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instru-

ment by ﬁrst copying them to the storage media, then connecting/inserting the

media to the instrument.

Not only ﬁles created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI ﬁles created

on other devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the

computer. Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the USB [TO

DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the data on the instrument.

Instrument

Computer

USB storage

device

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal

Saves internal data to a USB storage device.

USB storage device

Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it

to the computer.

Backing up data to a computer and organizing ﬁles/folders.

Instrument

USB storage

device

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal

Reading ﬁles on the USB storage device from the instrument.

Computer

USB storage device

Copying the ﬁles of the hard disk of the computer to the

USB storage device.

Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it

to the instrument.

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 65

Basic Operation

Connections

Connecting a personal computer

By connecting a computer to the USB [TO HOST] or MIDI terminals, you can transfer data between the

instrument and the computer via MIDI, and take advantage of sophisticated computer music software. Keep

in mind that you also need to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver.

Driver:

A driver is software that pro-

vides a data-transfer interface

between the computer’s operat-

ing system and a connected

hardware device. You need to

install a USB MIDI driver to con-

nect the computer and the

instrument.

There are the two methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal

computer:

1. Connecting the USB port on the computer to the Clavinova’s USB [TO

HOST] terminal (see below)

2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI terminals (page 66)

If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, we recommend that you

connect the computer and the instrument by USB, rather than by MIDI.

For more information, refer to the following pages.

When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, ﬁrst turn off the power of the

Clavinova and quit any application software that is open on the computer before con-

necting any cables. After making connections, turn on the power to the Clavinova.

If you are not using the connection between the Clavinova and your computer, you

must disconnect the cable from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. The Clavinova may not

operate correctly if a cable is left connected.

Connecting the USB port on the computer to the

Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST] terminal

Use a USB cable to connect the USB port on your computer to the USB [TO

HOST] terminal on the Clavinova.

TERMINOLOGY

CAUTION

USB

TO DEVICE

TO HOST

Instrument

USB [TO HOST] terminal

USB cable

Computer

• The instrument will begin

transmission a short time after

the USB connection is made.

• When using a USB cable to

connect the instrument to your

computer, make the connec-

tion directly without passing

through a USB hub.

• For information on setting up

your sequence software, refer

to the owner’s manual of the

relevant software.

TIP

66 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Connections

Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI terminals

Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using

special MIDI cables.

CAUTION

Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST] terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, make sure to

observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and cor-

rupting or losing data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to

the instrument off and restart the computer.

•Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, exit from any

power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby), and

quit any open application software, also turns off the power to the instrument.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument off or

unplugging the USB cable to/from the instrument/computer.

- Quit any open application software on the computer.

-Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is

transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.)

• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six

seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of

the instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/discon-

necting the USB cable.

Instrument

USB port or serial port

(modem or printer terminal)

MIDI cable

Computer

MIDI interface

MIDI [IN] terminal

MIDI [OUT]

terminal

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 67

Detailed Settings

68 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as ﬁne tuning the pitch,

selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. For the basic procedure to make these settings,

refer to page 93.

Parameter List

Recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Metronome [METRONOME SETTING]

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device Save 48

Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from

a USB storage device

Delete 49

Renaming ﬁles Rename 50

Copying ﬁles Copy 51

Moving ﬁles Move 53

Making folders in the USB storage device MakeDir 54

Formatting a USB storage device Format 54

Automatically selecting a song in storage media SongAutoOpen 55

Changing the type of characters on screen CharacterCode 55

Playing back a song/all songs repeatedly SongRepeat 73

Playing back the phrase speciﬁed by the phrase number PhraseMark 73

Correcting note timing Quantize 74

Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with

the ﬁrst voicing

QuickPlay 74

Auditioning the channels ChannelListen 75

Deleting data from each channel ChannelClear 75

Selecting a record starting method RecStart 39

Selecting a record ending method RecEnd 39

Recording parts 3-16 (Extra Parts) RecExtraPartsCh 41

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Setting the metronome time signature TimeSignature 76

Setting the metronome volume level MetronomeVolume 76

Setting the metronome voice MetronomeSound 76

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 69

Detailed Settings

Voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode, parameters with the “ ” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.

iAFC [iAFC SETTING]

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Setting the octave* Octave 78

Setting the volume level* Volume 78

Setting the position of right and left channels* Pan 78

Make ﬁne adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode) Detune 78

Selecting the reverb type ReverbType 79

Setting the reverb depth* ReverbSend 79

Selecting the chorus type ChorusType 79

Setting the chorus depth* ChorusSend 79

Setting the chorus on/off ChorusOnOff 80

Selecting the DSP type* DSP Type (DSP) 80

Setting the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect* VibeRotorSpeed 80

Tu r ning the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off*

VibeRotorOnOff

(RotorOnOff)

Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speaker* RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed) 81

Adjusting the depth of the DSP effect* DSPDepth 81

Adjusting the brightness of the sound* Brightness 81

Adjusting the resonance effect*

HarmonicContent

(Harmonic)

Adjusting the low-range frequency of the equalizer* EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq) 81

Adjusting the low-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the

equalizer*

EQ LowGain 82

Adjusting the high-range frequency of the equalizer* EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq) 82

Adjusting the high-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the

equalizer*

EQ HighGain 82

Setting the touch sensitivity* TouchSense 82

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Tu r ning iAFC on/off iAFC 83

Adjusting the Dynamic Damper Effect depth DynDmpFX Depth 83

Adjusting the Spatial Effect depth SpatialFX Depth 84

Calibration (automatic adjustment) Calibration 84

Restoring the default calibration setting iAFC Default 84

70 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Changing the key Transpose 85

Selecting a touch response TouchResponse 85

Fine tuning the pitch Tune 86

Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice PianoTuningCurve 86

Selecting a scale Scale 86

Specifying the Split Point SplitPoint 87

Setting the right pedal function RPedalFunc 87

Setting the center pedal function CPedalFunc 87

Setting the left pedal function LPedalFunc 87

Setting the auxiliary pedal function AuxPedalFunc 88

Tu r ning the right pedal function on/off RPedalOnOff 88

Tu r ning the center pedal function on/off CPedalOnOff 88

Tu r ning the left pedal function on/off LPedalOnOff 88

Tu r ning the auxiliary pedal function on/off AuxPedalOnOff 89

Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to the pedal PedalPlay/Pause 89

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal AuxPedalType 89

Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect

the sound

HalfPedalPoint 89

Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal SoftPedalDepth 89

Setting the depth of string resonance StringResonanceDepth 90

Setting the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal SustainSamplingDepth 90

Specifying the volume of the key-off sound KeyOffSamplingDepth 90

Setting the range of pitch bend PitchBendRange 90

Switching the speaker on/off Speaker 90

Selecting the AUX OUT level (Fixed/Variable) AuxOutLevel 91

Setting the MIDI transmit channel MidiOutChannel 91

Setting the MIDI receive channel MidiInChannel 91

Tu r ning local control on/off LocalControl 92

Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for

MIDI transmission

MidiOutSelect 92

Selecting a type of data received via MIDI ReceiveParameter 92

Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI TransmitParameter 92

Transmitting the initial settings on the panel InitialSetup 93

Selecting items saved at shutdown MemoryBackup 93

Restoring the normal (default) settings FactorySet 93

Backing up the Clavinova’s internal data FullBackup 94

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 71

Detailed Settings

Making detailed settings

Procedure

1. Access a setting menu.

Press the desired setting button ([FILE/SONG SETTING], MET-

RONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [iAFC SETTING], or

[FUNCTION]) to access the corresponding setting menu.

Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu.

2. Select the desired parameter or part.

Press the setting button, A [–][+], and/or C [–][+] buttons

repeatedly as required.

3. Set the parameter or part.

Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use the B

[– (NO)][+ (YES)], C [–][+], and D [–][+] buttons to select or set

the option.

To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons

simultaneously.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

12 3

3 4

72 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

4. Write, execute, or save the data.

There are two ways to respond to the messages.

If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears:

Press the B [+(YES)] button to display conﬁrmation (“Sure?→”). To

proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays

“Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it

displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous

screen.

To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B

[+(YES)] button.

When “Overwrite?

→” appears after the “Completed” message, press

the B [+(YES)] button.

If “Set?→” appears:

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova

displays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is com-

plete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the

previous screen.

5. Close the setting menu.

Press the [EXIT] button.

NO YES

Quantize Execute?-->

Strength=100% 1/4

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Octave 0

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 73

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for recording and

playback [FILE/SONG SETTING]

You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PRE-

SET”), memory songs (“MEMORY”), or External songs (“USB1”) (see page 56).

Procedure

Select the desired song and press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button to access the “File/Song

Setting” menu.

You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single

song selected from the 50 preset songs or from the

USB storage devices.

•When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the

song you selected using the front panel, then

starts repeat playback of the speciﬁed songs until

you press the [STOP] button.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

[USBSongs] All songs in the media inserted in

the USB storage device

[MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s memory

[USB+Memory] All songs from “USBSongs” and

“MemorySongs”

[PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs

[ALL] All songs from “USBSongs,” “Mem-

orySongs,” and “PresetSongs”

[OneSong] One song selected from the front

panel

When several USB storage devices are connected, the device

which contains the previously selected song is the destination

device.

If you select a song from an ensemble collection

disk, such as the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or

one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can specify

phrase numbers in the score to play back from the

score from the mark point, or to play back the

phrase repeatedly.

•If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On”

selected, the count down starts, followed by the

repeated playback of the speciﬁed phrase until

you press the [STOP] button.

•If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts

without repeat.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range of the phrase number:

--- (not speciﬁed)

0 - the last phrase number of the song

If you select any song other than those from the “Disk

Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano”

disks, you can select only “Off.”

For information on the settings “Save” – “CharacterCode,” see “Handling ﬁles such as deleting

song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]” on page 45.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

[FILE/SONG SETTING] button

Playing back a song/all songs repeat-

edly [SongRepeat]

NO YES

SongRepeat Off

USBSongs

Select on or off.

Specify the repeated songs.

TIP

Playing back the phrase speciﬁed by

the phrase number [PhraseMark]

NO YES

PhraseMark RepeatOff

001

Select repeat on or off.

Specify the phrase number.

74 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING]

You can correct the timing of notes. For example,

you can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or

sixteenth notes.

•Changes are made by song.

See the procedure on page 71.

Notes for which you can adjust the timing:

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are

exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two

different note values at the same time. For example, when the

straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in

the same part, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all

notes in the part are quantized to straight eighth notes—com-

pletely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you use the

eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and

triplet notes will be quantized correctly.

From this display, you can determine how strongly

the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% pro-

duces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is

selected, notes will be moved toward the speciﬁed

quantization beats according to the speciﬁed per-

centage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets

you preserve some of the “human” feel in the

recording.

Setting range:

0% – 100%

This parameter enables you to specify whether a

song that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song

with a silence prior to the ﬁrst note, should be

played from the ﬁrst note or from the top of the bar

(rest or blank).

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

[On] Playing from the ﬁrst note

[Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest

or blank)

Correcting note timing [Quantize]

NO YES

Quantize Execute?-->

Strength= 50% 1/8

Stores the changed value.

Speciﬁes the type of note.

1/4.................

1/8.................

1/16...............

1/6.................

1/12...............

1/24...............

1/8+1/12...........

1/16+1/24.........

1/32...............

1/16+1/12.........

quarter note

quarter note triplet

eighth note

eighth note triplet

sixteenth note

sixteenth note triplet

thirty-second note

eighth note + eighth note triplet*

sixteenth note + eighth note triplet*

sixteenth note + sixteenth triplet*

Specifying whether playback starts

immediately along with the ﬁrst voic-

ing [QuickPlay]

Quarter-note length

Original data

Quantizing

strength=100

Quantizing

strength=50

NO YES

QuickPlay

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 75

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING]

You can select a single channel to listen to its con-

tents. Playback starts from the ﬁrst note.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16

The song data consists of 16 channels. A channel is assigned

to a part, so in this instrument, channel means the same as

part.

Even channels that contain no data are displayed.

You can delete data from each of 16 channels.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels)

The song data consists of 16 channels. A channel is assigned

to a part, so in this instrument, channel means the same as

part.

Even channels that contain no data are displayed.

When you clear all channels using the “ALL” parameter, you

can overwrite the song. In this case, the ﬁle which contains

song settings with no channel data is saved.

Auditioning the channels

[ChannelListen]

NO YES

ChannelListen Start?-->

Ch1

Playback continues as long as you press

and hold down this button.

Select the desired channel for playback.

TIP

Deleting data from each channel

[ChannelClear]

NO YES

ChannelClear Execute?-->

Ch1

Delete data.

Select the desired channel for deletion.

TIP

For information on the settings “RecStart” and “RecEnd,” see “Re-recording a song partially” on

page 39.

For information on the setting “RecExtraPartsCh,” see “Recording a performance of several differ-

ent parts” on page 41.

76 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for the metronome

METRONOME [SETTING]

You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome.

Procedure

Press the METRONOME [SETTING] button to access the Metronome Setting menu.

See the procedure on page 71.

For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–][+] but-

tons to select “3” and the D [–][+] buttons to select

“4.”

Setting range for the numerator:

1 - 16

Setting options for the denominator:

2, 4, and 8

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

0 - 127

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

[BellOff] Click (standard metronome

sound)

[EnglishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English

[GermanVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German

[JapaneseVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese

[FrenchVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French

[SpanishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish

[BellOn] Click and bell

To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.”

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

METRONOME [SETTING] button

Setting the metronome time signa-

ture [TimeSignature]

Setting the metronome volume level

[MetronomeVolume]

NO YES

TimeSignature

4/ 4

Set the numerator of

the time signature.

Set the denominator

of the time signature.

NO YES

MetronomeVolume

100

Selecting the metronome voice

[MetronomeSound]

NO YES

MetronomeSound

BellOff

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 77

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for the voices

[VOICE SETTING]

This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects.

You can make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the

notes you play on the keyboard while changing the settings.

Procedure

1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the “Voice Set-

ting” menu.

2. Press the A [–][+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the

voice.

The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice.

[Main] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode)

[Main

× Layer] MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual mode)

[Left] LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode)

[Left

× Layer] LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode)

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

[VOICE SETTING] button

78 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1

and Voice 2 individually.

Parameter names enclosed in parentheses ( ) are displayed in

Dual mode.

The pitch of a note can be shifted upward or down-

ward in steps of an octave.

See the procedure on page 71.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

–2 (two octaves lower) - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two

octaves higher)

You can set the volume level for each voice part.

See the procedure on page 71.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

You can specify the position in the stereo image

from which you hear the sound.

See the procedure on page 71.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right)

The pitch of the two sounds selected in Dual mode

can be “skewed” slightly away from each other.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

–20 - +20 (Positive (+) settings will raise the pitch of the

ﬁrst sound and lower the pitch of the second sound.

Negative (–) settings will do the opposite.)

Setting the octave [Octave]*

Setting the volume level [Volume]*

TIP

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Octave 0

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

Octave(GrndPno1) 0

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Volume 100

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

Volume(GrndPno1) 100

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

Setting the position of right and left

channels [Pan]*

Make ﬁne adjustments to the pitch

(only in Dual mode) [Detune]

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Pan C

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

Pan(GrndPno1) C

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

Detune + 3

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 79

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and

“LeftXLayer.”

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Room Simulates reverberation in a room.

Hall1 Simulates reverberation in a concert hall.

Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of

“Hall1.”

Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument

sound.

Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal

plate.

The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter is

set to “0.”

See the procedure on page 71.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and

“Left × Layer.”

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Chorus Adds a rich, spacious sound.

Celeste Adds swell and a spacious sound.

Flanger Adds swell effects of an ascending or

descending jet plane.

See the procedure on page 71.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

Setting the reverb type

[ReverbType]

Setting the reverb depth

[ReverbSend]*

TIP

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ReverbType Hall1

TIP

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ReverbSend 14

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

ReverbSend(E.Piano1) 26

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

Selecting the chorus type

[Chorus Type]

Setting the chorus depth

[ChorusSend]*

TIP

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ChorusType Chorus

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ChorusSend 48

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

ChorusSend(E.Piano1) 72

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

80 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for

each voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/

off setting for the voice automatically changes

according to this parameter.

Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is dis-

abled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

On/Off

You can select other effects (than reverb and cho-

rus).

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and

right positions.

DelayLR Delay applied at left and right posi-

tions.

Echo Echo-like delay

CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed.

Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect.

Rotary Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary

speaker.

Tremolo The volume level changes in rapid

cycles.

VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibraphone.

AutoPanThe sound pans left to right and

back and forth.

Phaser The phase changes periodically,

swelling the sound.

AutoWahThe center frequency of the wah ﬁl-

ter changes periodically.

SoundBoard Simulates the reverberation of a

piano soundboard.

Off No effect.

Rotor= The rotating portion of an electrical device etc.

This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected

for the DSP Type parameter explained above.

This sets the speed of the vibrato effect that is

applied when you have selected Vibraphone and

are using the VibeRotor pedal.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

1 - 10

This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected

for the DSP Type parameter explained above.

It turns on/off the vibrato effect that is applied

when you use the VibeRotor pedal.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

On/Off

Setting the chorus on/off

[ChorusOnOff]

Selecting the DSP type*

[DSP Type (DSP)]

TIP

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ChorusOnOff Off

NO YES

Main Set?-->

DSP Type DelayLCR

Setting the speed of the vibraphone

vibrato effect* [VibeRotorSpeed]

Turning the vibraphone vibrato effect

on/off*

[VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff)]

TERMINOLOGY

NO YES

Main Set?-->

VibeRotorSpeed 6

NO YES

Main Set?-->

VibeRotorOnOff On

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 81

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

This will be displayed only if Rotary is selected for the

DSP Type parameter explained above.

It sets the rotation speed of the rotary speaker effect.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Slow/Fast

This sets the depth of the DSP effect (page 80).

Some DSP Type settings do not allow you to set the

DSPDepth.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

1 (output only the original sound with almost no effect

applied) - 127 (output only the sound processed by the

effect)

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

–64 - +63

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

–64 - +63

Resonance can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone, making the

sound brighter and harder.

Equalizer:

An audio equalizer divides the frequency spectrum into multi-

ple regions and enables the user to adjust the relative ampli-

tude of each region.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

32 Hz - 2.0 kHz

Setting the rotation speed of the

rotary speaker*

[RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed)]

Adjusting the depth of the DSP

effect* [DSPDepth]

Adjusting the brightness of the

sound* [Brightness]

NO YES

Main Set?-->

RotarySpeed Slow

NO YES

Main Set?-->

DSPDepth 127

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Brightness 0

Adjusting the resonance effect*

[HarmonicContent (Harmonic)]

Adjusting the low-range frequency of

the equalizer*

[EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq)]

NO YES

Main Set?-->

HarmonicContent 0

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

Low Gain

High Gain

Low Freq. High Freq.

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ LowFreq. 32

82 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

–12 - +12 dB

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

500 Hz - 16.0 kHz

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

–12 - +12 dB

This parameter enables determines the manner

and degree to which the volume level changes in

response to your touch on the keyboard (how hard

you play). Since the volume level of the harpsi-

chords and pipe organs do not change regardless of

how you play the keyboard, the normal setting for

these voices is 127. (See the setting range below.)

See the procedure on page 71.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127 (loud-

est and ﬁxed)

Adjusting the low-range gain

(amount of boost/cut) of the equal-

izer* [EQ LowGain]

Adjusting the high-range frequency

of the equalizer*

[EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq)]

Adjusting the high-range gain

(amount of boost/cut) of the equal-

izer* [EQ HighGain]

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ LowGain 0

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ HighFreq. 500

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ HighGain 0

Setting the touch sensitivity

[TouchSense]*

NO YES

Main Set?-->

TouchSense 64

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

TouchSense(GrndPno1) 64

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 83

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for iAFC

[iAFC SETTING]

When iAFC is engaged, the Clavinova will sound deeper and more resonant, similar to an acoustic musical

instruments. This lets you experience the ambience and reverberation that are characteristic of performing

on stage or simulates the sustain sound that occur when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano.

This section describes how to make various settings for the iAFC function. You can also perform an auto-

matic adjustment in order to obtain the optimal iAFC effect.

Procedure

Press [iAFC SETTING] button to enter iAFC Setting mode.

iAFC cannot be used in the following cases.

• When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay.

• When the Speaker setting is Normal, and headphones are connected.

• When the Speaker setting is off.

When using iAFC, do not block the speaker located on the rear panel of the Clavinova. The optimal iAFC effect cannot be obtained if

this speaker is blocked.

iAFC uses Yamaha’s EMR (Electronic Microphone Rotator) technology to ensure stability against acoustic feedback.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

On/Off

Dynamic Damper Effect is one type of the iAFC

effect. Dynamic Damper Effect simulates the sus-

tain sound that occurs when you press the damper

pedal of a grand piano. The internal microphones

are not used, but the sound produced within the

Clavinova is processed to create a spacious sensa-

tion, as you press the damper pedal and play the

keyboard.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

0 - 127

Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the ﬁrst time,

and after each time you move the Clavinova (page 84).

When the [iAFC SETTING] button is pressed before performing the automatic adjustment, the “Calibration” screen

will be displayed.

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

[iAFC SETTING] button

TIP

Turning iAFC on/off [iAFC]

NO YES

iAFC

Adjusting the Dynamic Damper Effect

depth [DynDmpFX Depth]

NO YES

DynDmpFX Depth

84 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING]

Spatial Effect is one type of the iAFC effect. Spatial

Effect creates a sense of reverberation and spa-

ciousness by picking up the output sound using

internal microphones and output the sound from

the speaker on the rear of the instrument. The

spread and spaciousness of the sound is different

depending on the depth. For lower depth settings,

this creates the resonance and enhances the acous-

tic realism of the sound that is characteristic of

acoustic instruments by creating a virtual sound-

board. For deeper depth settings, the sound of the

instrument itself and the sound of singing and

other instruments played nearby is picked up by

internal microphones, and processed to simulate

the spatial characteristics of performing together

on stage.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

0 - 127

This automatically adjusts the sensitivity and

response of iAFC so that the optimal iAFC effect

will be obtained.

When automatic adjust begins, a test sound (noise)

will sound for about ﬁve seconds.

While automatic adjustment is being performed,

do not make audible noises in the vicinity of the

Clavinova.

See the procedure on page 71.

The keyboard will not produce sound while automatic adjust-

ment is being performed. Nor is it possible to adjust the vol-

ume of the Clavinova.

This sets the calibration function to the default set-

ting.

See the procedure on page 71.

Adjusting the Spatial Effect depth

[SpatialFX Depth]

Calibration (automatic adjustment)

[Calibration]

NO YES

SpatialFX Depth

NO YES

Calibration Sure?-->

Test sound is output.

TIP

Restoring the default calibration set-

ting [iAFC Default]

NO YES

iAFC Default Set?-->

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 85

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc.

Procedure

Press the [FUNCTION] button to enter Function mode.

TRANSPOSE= To change the key

(Changing the key: To raise or lower the overall pitch of the

entire song.)

The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift

the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone inter-

vals to facilitate playing in difﬁcult key signatures, and to let

you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a

singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the trans-

position amount to “5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this

way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the

Clavinova will transpose it to the key of F.

Setting for:

Master The sound of the entire instrument (the

manually-played sound and the song

playback)

Keyboard The manually-played sound

Song The song playback

Setting range:

–12 (–1 octave) - 0 (normal pitch) - +12 (+1 octave)

You can specify a touch response (how the sound

responds to the way you play the keys).

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Light With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a

loud sound. The volume level of tones tends

to be consistent.

Medium Standard touch response.

HeavyYou must hit the key very hard to generate a

loud volume. This allows for versatile expres-

sion, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones.

Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be

the same regardless of how hard you play the

keys. Use the B [–][+] buttons to set the vol-

ume level.

Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level:

1 - 127

FUNCTION

iAFC

SETTING

CHORUSREVERB

BRILLIANCE

MELLOW BRIGHT

VOICE

SETTING

SPLIT

GUITAR

VIBRA-

PHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

WOOD

BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

METRONOME

ON/OFF

SETTING

DOWN

TEMPO

EXTRA

PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

SONG

SELECT

FILE/SONG

SETTING

PLAY/PAUSESTOPREC

SONG

NEW SONG

SYNC START

REPEAT

DEMOSONG BALANCE

KEYBOARD

SONG

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

VOICE

[FUNCTION] button

Changing the key [Transpose]

TIP

NO YES

Transpose

Master 0

Selecting a touch response

[TouchResponse]

NO YES

TouchResponse Vel= 64

Fixed

86 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

You can ﬁne tune the pitch of the entire instru-

ment. This function is useful when you play the

Clavinova along with other instruments or CD

music.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

A3 = 414.8 Hz - 466.8 Hz (0.2 Hz steps)

You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1”

and “GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the

tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite

match that of other instruments voices.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Stretch Tuning curve particularly for pianos

Flat Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave

doubled over the entire keyboard range

You can select various scales.

Equal Temperament is the most common contem-

porary piano tuning scale. However, history has

known numerous other scales, many of which

serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You

can experience the tunings of these genres.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal inter-

vals. Currently most popular piano tuning

scale.

PureMajor/PureMinor

Based on natural overtones, three major chords

using these scales produce a beautiful, pure

sound.

Pythagorean

This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek phi-

losopher, is based on the interval of a perfect

5th. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and

5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads.

MeanTone

This scale is an improvement of the

Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has

been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th

century through the late 18th century. Handel

used this scale.

Werc kmeister/Kirnberger

These scales combine Mean Tone and

Pythagorean in different ways. With these

scales, modulation changes the impression and

feel of the songs. They were often used in the

era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often

used now to reproduce the music of that era on

harpsichords.

Normal setting:

Equal

If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to specify

the root note using the B [–][+] buttons.

Setting range:

C, C



, D, E



, E, F, F



, G, A



, A, B



, B

Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]

Selecting a tuning curve for a

piano

voice [PianoTuningCurve]

NO YES

Tune

A3=440.0Hz

NO YES

PianoTuningCurve

Stretch

Selecting a scale [Scale]

NO YES

Scale BaseNote=C

PureMajor

NO YES

Scale BaseNote=C

PureMajor

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 87

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

You can specify the split point (the boundary between

the right-hand and left-hand keyboard areas).

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

A-1 - C7

You can also use [SPLIT] to set the split point. (page 34)

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Sustain ON/OFF switch type damper

SustainCont Damper that sustains the sound pro-

portionately to how deeply you press

the pedal

Sostenuto Sostenuto (page 28)

Soft Soft (page 28)

Expression A function that lets you create

changes in dynamics (volume) as

you play

PitchBend Up A function that smoothly raises the

pitch

PitchBend Down

A function that smoothly lowers the

pitch

RotarySpeed Change the rotational speed of the

JazzOrgan rotary speaker (switch

between fast/slow each time you

press the pedal)

VibeRotor Switch the vibraphone vibrato on/off

(switch on/off each time you press

the pedal)

Normal setting:

SustainCont

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Same as “Setting the right pedal function” above, except

for the following parameters.

• SustainCont

• Expression

• PitchBend Up

• PitchBend Down

Normal Setting:

Sostenuto

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Same as “Setting the right pedal function” above, except

for the following parameters.

• SustainCont

• Expression

• PitchBend Up

• PitchBend Down

Normal Setting:

Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan, MellowOrgan

and VibraPhone), Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan and Mel-

lowOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor)

Specifying the Split Point [Split Point]

Setting the right pedal function

[RPedalFunc]

NO YES

SplitPoint

F#2

TIP

NO YES

RPedalFunc Set?-->

SustainCont

Setting the center pedal function

[CPedalFunc]

Setting the left pedal function

[LPedalFunc]

NO YES

CPedalFunc Set?-->

Sostenuto

NO YES

LPedalFunc Set?-->

Soft

88 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

You can assign a function to the pedal connected to

the Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Same as “Right pedal function assignment” (page 87).

Normal setting:

Expression

YAMAHA FC7 foot controller

This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression, Sus-

tainCont, or PitchBend Up/Down.

YAMAHA FC4 foot switch

YAMAHA FC5 foot switch

These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain, Soste-

nuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, or VibeRotor.

This turns the right pedal function on or off for the

relevant voice part. In other words, you can select

the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, Left-

Layer) and determine whether the right pedal

function (set on page 87) will affect that part or

not.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting for:

Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal Setting:

Different for each voice.

This turns the center pedal function on or off for

the relevant voice part. In other words, you can

select the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer,

Left, LeftLayer) and determine whether the center

pedal function (set on page 87) will affect that part

or not.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting for:

Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal Setting:

Different for each voice.

This turns the left pedal function on or off for the

relevant voice part. In other words, you can select

the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, Left-

Layer) and determine whether the left pedal func-

tion (set on page 87) will affect that part or not.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting for:

Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal Setting:

Different for each voice.

Setting the auxiliary pedal function

[AuxPedalFunc]

Turning the right pedal function on/

off [RPedalOnOff]

NO YES

AuxPedalFunc Set?-->

Expression

TIP

NO YES

RPedalOnOff Set?-->

Main On

Select on or off.

Select the voice part for which

the right pedal on/off setting is

to be changed.

Turning the center pedal function

on/off [CPedalOnOff]

Turning the left pedal function on/off

[LPedalOnOff]

NO YES

CPedalOnOff Set?-->

Main On

Select on or off.

Select the voice part for which

the center pedal on/off setting

is to be changed.

NO YES

LPedalOnOff Set?-->

Main On

Select on or off.

Select the voice part for which

the left pedal on/off setting is

to be changed.

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 89

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

This turns the auxiliary pedal function on or off

for the relevant voice part. In other words, you can

select the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer,

Left, LeftLayer) and determine whether the auxil-

iary pedal function (set on page 88) will affect that

part or not.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting for:

Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal Setting:

Different for each voice.

If you assign the SONG PLAY/PAUSE function to a pedal and

turn the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal

in the Function menu (pages 87 and 88) is disabled.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting for:

Left, Center, AUX

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

Off for all pedals

A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] jack may

switch on and off differently. For example, some

pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off

when you press them.

Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Make, Break

Here you can specify the point to which you must

depress the pedal (right and AUX) before the

assigned effect begins to be applied.This setting

applies only to the “SustainCont” effect (page 87)

that is assigned to the right or AUX pedal.

Setting range:

–2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effective

with the deepest press)

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

1 - 10

Turning the auxiliary pedal function

on/off [AuxPedalOnOff]

Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE]

function to the pedal

[PedalPlay/Pause]

NO YES

AuxPedalOnOff Set?-->

Main On

Select on or off.

Select the voice part for which

the AUX pedal on/off setting is

to be changed.

TIP

NO YES

PedalPlay/Pause

Center Off

Select a pedal to assign

the function

Select on or off.

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal

[AuxPedalType]

Setting the point at which the

damper pedal starts to affect the

sound [HalfPedalPoint]

Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal

[SoftPedalDepth]

NO YES

AuxPedalType

Make

NO YES

HalfPedalPoint

NO YES

SoftPedalDepth

90 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

This parameter is effective on the voices, such as

“Grand Piano 1.”

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Off, 1 - 10

This parameter is effective only on the voice group

“GRANDPIANO1.”

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Off, 1 - 10

You can adjust the volume of the key-off sound (the

subtle sound that occurs when you release a key)

This is effective on the voice groups “Grand

Piano1,” “Harpsichord,” and “E.Clavichord” and

on the voice “E.Piano2.”

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Off, 1 - 10

This speciﬁes the amount of change that can be

produced by the pitch bend function which

smoothly varies the pitch.

•This setting applies only to the manually-played

sound.

•This setting can be made in semitone steps.

•You can set the pedal function (page 87) to spec-

ify whether the pitch will be raised or lowered.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

0 - +12 (Pressing the pedal will raise/lower the pitch by

12 semitones [1 octave])

Normal setting:

–2

This setting lets you switch the speaker on/off.

See the procedure on page 71.

Normal (HeadphoneSW)

The speaker will sound only if headphones

are not connected.

On The speaker will always sound.

Off The speaker will not sound.

Setting the depth of string resonance

[StringResonanceDepth]

Setting the depth of sustain sampling

for the damper pedal

[SustainSamplingDepth]

Specifying the volume of the key-off

sound [KeyOffSamplingDepth]

NO YES

StringResonanceDepth

NO YES

SustainSamplingDepth

NO YES

KeyOffSamplingDepth

Setting the range of pitch bend

[PitchBendRange]

Switching the speaker on/off

[Speaker]

NO YES

PitchBendRange

NO YES

Speaker

Normal(HeadphoneSW)

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 91

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

Select the volume level of the signal output from

the AUX OUT jacks. When “Fixed” is selected, the

level cannot be controlled by using the [MASTER

VOLUME] control. When “Variable” is selected,

the level can be controlled by using the [MASTER

VOLUME] control.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Fixed/Variable

Normal Setting:

Fixed

This parameter enables you to specify the channel

on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting for:

Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer

Setting range:

Midi/Usb1 Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.)

Normal setting:

Main — Midi/Usb1 Ch1

Left — Midi/Usb1 Ch2

Layer — Midi/Usb1 Ch3

Left Layer — Midi/Usb1 Ch4

You can specify whether each channel of data from

MIDI [IN] and USB [TO HOST] will be received.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting for:

Midi/Usb1 Ch1 - Ch16

Usb2 Ch1 - 16

Setting range:

Song, Main, Left, Layer, LeftLayer, Keyboard, Off

Normal setting:

Midi/Usb1 Ch1- Ch16 — Song

Usb2 Ch1 — Keyboard

Usb2 Ch2 — Main

Usb2 Ch3 — Left

Usb2 Ch4 — Layer

Usb2 Ch5 — LeftLayer

Others — Off

Selecting the AUX OUT level

[AuxOutLevel]

Setting the MIDI transmit channel

[MidiOutChannel]

NO YES

AuxOutLevel

Fixed

NO YES

MidiOutChannel

Main Midi/Usb1Ch1

Select a voice part. Specify the channel.

Setting the MIDI receive channel

[MidiInChannel]

NO YES

MidiInChannel

Midi/Usb1Ch1 Song

Select a channel Select a MIDI receive part

USB TO HOST

MIDI IN

Midi/Usb1

Ch1 - Ch16

Usb2

Ch1 - Ch16

Keyboard

– LeftLayer

Song

92 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

“Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavi-

nova produces the sound from its tone generator

when you play the keyboard. In “Local Control

Off” state, the keyboard and the tone generator are

cut off from each other. This means that even if

you play the keyboard, the Clavinova will not pro-

duce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be

transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device,

which can produce the sound. The “Local Control

Off” setting is useful when you wish to play an

external sound source while playing the keys on the

Clavinova.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

You can select whether your performance data or

song playback data is sent via MIDI.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting range:

Keyboard performance data played on the keyboard

Song song playback data

Normal setting:

Keyboard

This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI

data the Clavinova can receive.

See the procedure on page 71.

Type of data:

Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System

Exclusive)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all types of data

This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI

data the Clavinova can transmit.

See the procedure on page 71.

Type of data:

Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime,

SysEx (System Exclusive)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all types of data

Turning Local control on/off

[LocalControl]

Selecting performance from the

keyboard or song data for MIDI

transmission [MidiOutSelect]

NO YES

LocalControl

NO YES

MidiOutSelect

Keyboard

Selecting a type of data received via

MIDI [ReceiveParameter]

Selecting a type of data transmitted

via MIDI [TransmitParameter]

NO YES

ReceiveParameter

Note On

Select a type of data. Select on or off.

NO YES

TransmitParameter

Note On

Select a type of data. Select on or off.

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 93

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

You can transmit the panel data, such as voice

selection, to a connected sequencer. Before you

record performance data to a sequencer, it is useful

if you ﬁrst send and record (at the beginning of the

performance data) the panel setup data for your

performance during playback.

See the procedure on page 71.

You can back up some settings, such as voice selec-

tion and metronome setting, so that they will not

be lost after you turn off the power to the Clavi-

nova.

•Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s mem-

ory), the backup on/off setting (this parameter

setting), and the “CharacterCode” parameter set-

ting (page 55) are always backed up.

See the procedure on page 71.

Setting for:

Tr anspose

Brilliance

ReverbOnOff

iAfc

SplitPoint

Main/LeftVoice

MetronomeSetting

File/SongSetting

MidiSetting (“MidiOutChannel” – “TransmitParame-

ter” in the Function settings)

Function (except for Transpose, SplitPoint and Midi set-

tings).

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, and

Function (except for Transpose and SplitPoint setting)

parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set to

On.

You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory

default) settings.

•The CharacterCode parameter setting (page 55)

does not change.

•The MemoryBackup parameter setting (On/Off)

(left column) is reset to the normal setting.

•You can specify whether the memory songs are

erased or kept.

See the procedure on page 71.

Do not turn off the power during factory set. Doing so could

result in damage to the data.

Selecting for “MemorySong”:

MemorySongExcluded Memory songs are kept.

MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are erased.

Transmitting the initial settings on

the panel [InitialSetup]

Selecting items saved at shutdown

[MemoryBackup]

NO YES

InitialSetup Start?-->

NO YES

MemoryBackup

Transpose Off

Select the desired item. Select on or off.

Restoring the normal (default) set-

tings [FactorySet]

CAUTION

NO YES

FactorySet Execute?-->

MemorySongExcluded

Reset the Clavinova.

Select whether the memory songs

are erased or kept.

94 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

Other method for restoring the normal

settings

Press and hold down the white key on the right end

(C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the

power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory

songs saved in the storage memory are not erased.

For maximum data security Yamaha recommends

that you copy or save your important data to a USB

storage device. This provides a convenient backup

if the internal memory is damaged. Perform the

operation after connecting the USB storage device.

See the procedure on page 71.

It's best not to connect several USB storage devices when back-

ing up your data. When several devices are connected, a speciﬁc

device cannot be identiﬁed for saving data.

Do not execute “FullBackup” during ﬁle operations such as

loading songs. Doing so could result in damage to the data.

It may take 1 – 2 minutes to complete the backup.

Do not turn off the power during full backup. Doing so could

result in damage to the data.

Protected songs (indicated by MS/Ms in the display) cannot be

saved. Move the songs to the USB storage device before exe-

cuting Full Backup. If you do not move the protected songs

and keep the data only in the internal memory, the data will be

deleted when you load the backup settings to the instrument.

POWER

VARIATI ON

BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT

CHORUS ON

OFFREVERB

O 2

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

AFC

SETTING

AFC

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

EFFECT

[POWER] switch

Backing up the Clavinova's internal

data [FullBackup]

NO YES

FullBackup Execute?-->

Save

Select “Save” or “Load.”

Perform backup.

TIP

CAUTION

TIP

CAUTION

TIP

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 95

Detailed Settings

Message List

The messages are listed in alphabetical order.

Message Meaning

•This message appears when data has failed to be written or loaded

to the Storage memory or USB storage device. When you write or

load data via USB storage device, check the USB cable connection

and try again. If you still see this message, the Storage memory/

media/device may have malfunctioned or may be damaged.

•This message appears when a Read-Only ﬁle is selected to be over-

written. The ﬁle cannot to be overwritten.

When you delete a folder, this message asks you whether you want to

delete all of the ﬁles in that folder. To delete all ﬁles in the folder,

press the D [+ (YES)] button. To cancel, press the D [– (NO)] but-

ton.

This message will appear when there is insufﬁcient empty space in

backup memory. Turn the power switch off and turn it on again to

delete unnecessary backup data.

This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possi-

ble and the settings reset to their default values. In this case, perform

the automatic adjustment once again.

This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possi-

ble because the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay.

In this case, open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess.

This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possi-

ble because no sound is output from the rear speaker. In this case if

the “Speaker” setting is Off, turn “Speaker” On. If “Speaker” is set to

Normal and headphones are connected, unplug the headphones.

This message will appear to conﬁrm start of the iAFC calibration.

When calibrating, a test tone will sound from the instrument.

This message conﬁrms that the operation has been cancelled.

This message appears when you do the following operation to a pro-

tected song:

• Overwrite (protected songs cannot be overwritten)

• Save with a new name (protected songs cannot be used with

“Save as” function)

• Delete (this message conﬁrms that the protected song will be

deleted)

• Rename (renamed protected songs may not be played back)

AccessError

AllFiles?-->

BackupMemoryFull

CalibrationError

DefaultReset

Calibration

Lid is closed. Open Lid.

Calibration

Speaker sound is off

Calibration Sure?-->

Test sound is output.

Canceled

Caution ProtectedSong

96 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Message List

Message Meaning

This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The

Clavinova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the

next step.

This message appears when a communication error occurred

between the instrument and drive. Check the USB cable connection

and try again. If you still see this message, use a drive whose compat-

ibility has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha (page 62).

The number of drives exceeds the limitation. Two USB storage

devices can be connected to one USB [TO DEVICE] terminal using a

hub device. This instrument can recognize up to four drives in one

USB storage device.

The connection has been cut off because of an abnormal power

surge to the drive. To recover from this, turn the power switch of the

hub off and on again, or disconnect the USB storage device from the

instrument and turn the power switch of the instrument off and on

again.

This message appears when the USB storage device is removed from

the instrument.

When you attempted to rename a song and save it in “Rename”

(page 50), this message will appear if an identically-named song

already exists. Three seconds after this message is displayed, you will

return to the previous screen. Please specify a different name.

This message prompts you to execute a ﬁle-related operation. Press

the B [+ (YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to

cancel.

The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the mes-

sage disappears, then proceed to the next step.

This message appears when factory set is completed. The instrument

is then restarted.

The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song

setting) (“FactorySet” on page 93) have been restored. This message

also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and turn on the

power to the Clavinova (page 94).

The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song

setting) (“FactorySet” on page 93) have been restored.

This message will appear when loading of the backup ﬁle is com-

pleted. The instrument is then restarted.

Completed

DriveError

DriveNumLimitOver

DrivePowerError

DriveRemoved

DuplicateName

Execute?-->

Executing

FactorySet Completed

Restart

FactorySet Executing

MemorySongExcluded

FactorySet Executing

MemorySongIncluded

FullBackup Completed

Restart

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 97

Detailed Settings

Message List

Message Meaning

There is a problem with the USB [TO HOST] terminal

•When using the CLP-295GP connected to your personal com-

puter:

The driver or MIDI application on your computer is not function-

ing correctly, perhaps because the computer is turned off, the cable

is not connected correctly. In this case, turn off the power of the

CLP-295GP and your computer, and check the cable connections.

Then turn on the power in the order of your computer

→ CLP-

295GP, and check that the driver and MIDI application on your

computer are functioning correctly.

•When using the CLP-295GP by itself:

This message may appear if a cable is left connected to the USB

[TO HOST] terminal of the CLP-295GP. In this case, turn off the

power of the CLP-295GP, disconnect the cable, and then turn on

the power again. If the cable is left connected, the CLP-295GP may

not function correctly.

This message will appear when the power is turned on after turning

off the power while saving a song or internal settings. The internal

memory is being checked while this message appears. If the internal

settings are damaged, they will be reset to the initial settings. If

Memory songs are damaged, they will be deleted.

This message appears when you attempt to create a folder to a USB

storage device that cannot be accessed. Check that the USB storage

device is connected to the instrument and that the [SELECT] switch

speciﬁes the appropriate device, then try again.

There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any

more songs. Save songs to an external device (page 48) or delete

some songs in the storage memory, then save new data to memory.

A USB storage device was not connected to the instrument when

you attempted to perform a drive-related function. Connect the

device and continue.

•This message will appear when there is no ﬁle to load from the

media, even if the ﬁle name is displayed. Securely insert the media.

•This message will appear when two-byte letters are included in the

ﬁle name.

You tried to copy a song that does not exist in the Storage memory

or on USB storage device. Select a Memory song or External song via

the [SONG SELECT] button.

You tried to move a song that does not exist in the Storage memory

or on USB storage device. Select a Memory song or External song via

the [SONG SELECT] button.

HostError

LastPowerOffIllegal

MemoryChecking

MakeDir

---:Select USB Drive

MemoryFull

NoDrive

NoFile

NoSongToCopy

NoSongToMove

98 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Message List

Message Meaning

You tried to rename a song that does not exist in the Storage mem-

ory or on USB storage device. Select a Memory song or External

song via the [SONG SELECT] button.

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite

the existing data with new data. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to

allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.

This message appears when Musicsoft Downloader is started on a

computer connected to the instrument. When this message appears,

you cannot operate the instrument.

You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right

after you select the song. Wait until the message disappears.

This message appears when you try to write (save), copy, or delete

data on a protected drive/media. Set protect to off and try again. If

you still see this message, the disk is internally protected (such as

commercially available music data). You cannot write or copy to

such a disk.

This message appears when a protected song and the drive are not

compatible. Use a drive whose compatibility has been conﬁrmed by

Yamaha (page 62).

You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected ﬁles (such as

commercially available music data). You cannot write to, copy, or

delete such ﬁles.

This message appears when you play back a protected song which

has a ﬁle format error.

After you load an internally-protected song into the Clavinova’s

Current memory or storage memory, you tried to save the song to a

USB storage device. You cannot save such a song to another disk. You

cannot write or copy to such a disk.

This message appears when you copy a protected song. Protected

songs cannot be copied. However, you can move the song (page 53).

This message appears when you attempt to save a protected song

(security song). Protected songs cannot be saved.

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the

edited settings. Press the B [+(YES)] button to save the settings.

Press the [EXIT] button to cancel.

NoSongToRename

Overwrite?-->

PC<->CLP

InCommunication

PleaseWait

ProtectedDrive

ProtectedDriveError

ProtectedFile

ProtectedFileFormatError

ProtectedSong

ProtectedSong:UseMove

SecuritySongIsProtected

CannotSave

Set?-->

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 99

Detailed Settings

Message List

Message Meaning

This message appears when you record or edit the protected song

and select another song. The recorded/edited protected song cannot

be saved. The song will be deleted when you select another song.

You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded

song to storage memory or an external device. If you continue the

operation, the recorded song will be lost. To delete the new record-

ing, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B

[+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the “Save” parameter

screen. Save the recorded song and proceed to another operation.

This message will appear if a problem is found with the song data

when you select a song or while the song is playing. In this case, rese-

lect the song, and try once again to play it back. If the message still

appears, the song data may have been damaged.

1. This message will be displayed if current memory ﬁlls up during

recording. Recording will stop automatically at this point. The

data that had been recorded up to that point will remain. This

message will also be displayed when you attempt to enter Record

mode for additional recording if that song already occupies all of

current memory. In this case, additional recording will not be pos-

sible. If there is an already-recorded part that you do not need to

keep, you can use “ChannelClear” (page 75) to delete the

unneeded part, so that you will then be able to record the equiva-

lent amount of additional material.

2. This message will be displayed when you select a song if that song

is larger than the capacity of the current memory (page 102). This

song cannot be loaded into the CLP-295GP, and cannot be played

back. Please select a different song.

This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the

B [+ (YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation.

This message prompts you to conﬁrm the execution. Press the B [+

(YES)] button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.

This message appears when the number of ﬁles and folders exceeds

the system limit. The maximum number of ﬁles/folders which can

be stored in a folder is 250. Try again after deleting/moving the

unnecessary ﬁle(s).

You tried to perform a ﬁle- or drive-related operation using an

unformatted media. Eject the media, format it using the “Format”

parameter (page 54), then try again.

SongChanged Clear?

SongChanged Save?

SongError

SongTooBig

Start?-->

Sure?-->

SystemLimit

UnformattedDrive

100 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Message List

Message Meaning

You tried to perform a ﬁle- or drive-related operation using an

unformatted media. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)]

button. To format the disk and try again, press the B [+ (YES)] but-

ton to display the format parameter (page 54).

This message appears when you connect an unsupported drive. Use

a drive whose compatibility has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha

(page 62).

•The connected drive does not support use of protected songs. Use

only drives whose compatibility has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha

(page 62).

•This message appears when the connected USB storage device is

damaged and cannot be accessed.

You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you

tried to change a song name that includes a character (or characters)

not supported by the CLP-295GP, and the CLP-295GP could not

process the name. The Clavinova displays the previous screen in

three seconds. Rename the song correctly.

This message appears when, in copying a song, the same folder has

been selected for both the source and destination. You cannot select

the same folder for both the source and destination. Select the differ-

ent folder as the destination folder.

UnformattedDrive Format?

UnsupportedDrive

WrongDrive

WrongName

WrongSelection

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 101

Detailed Settings

Questions about Operations and

Functions

■ The buttons do not respond.

While you are using a function, some buttons not

used for the function are disabled. If the song is play-

ing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the [EXIT]

button to return to the main screen. Then, perform

the desired operation.

■ The sound sustains indeﬁnitely and does not

decay when I press the sostenuto pedal.

With the voices in the CHURCH ORGAN, JAZZ

ORGAN, STRINGS, CHOIR group, or some voices

in the XG group, the sound continues sustaining

while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal.

■ Higher or lower notes does not sound cor-

rectly when the transpose or octave setting

is made.

The setting range for the transposition and octave

setting is C-2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the

Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A-1 - C7.) If

the lowest key is set to a note lower than C-2, it will

produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest key

is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a

sound one octave lower.

■ How can I return to the recording or song

select screen during song recording or play-

back?

Press the [SONG SELECT] button once.

■ The tempo does not change even though I

recorded with tempo changes.

Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the

changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case,

the recording will be played back at the original

tempo.

Make tempo changes when the recording part is

selected and a red part indicator is ﬂashing. The

same trick applies to editing the tempo after record-

ing.

■ Performance in Dual or Split mode is not

recorded.

■ Part data is lost unexpectedly.

For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording part

for the second voice (that is, the voice for the left-

hand part) is automatically assigned (page 31).

Therefore, if the part already has data, the data will

be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to

Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song

is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played with

the second voice (or the notes lower than the Split

point) are not recorded.

■ What type of data is recorded?

Data recorded in the parts:

•Note data (notes you play)

•Voice selection

•Clavinova pedals and external pedal on/off

•Reverb depth [ReverbSend]

•Chorus depth [ChorusSend]

• DSP effect depth [DSPDepth]

•Sound brightness [Brightness]

•Resonance effect setting [HarmonicContent]

•Equalizer’s low-range frequency setting [EQLow-

Freq.]

•Equalizer’s low-range gain setting [EQLowGain]

•Equalizer’s high-range frequency setting

[EQHighFreq.]

•Equalizer’s high-range gain setting [EQHighGain]

•Octave setting of the voice [Octave]

•Volume setting of each voice [Volume]

•Left/right position of each sound [Pan]

• Fine pitch adjustment between two voices (Dual

only) [Detune]

•Volume change in response to playing strength for

each voice [TouchSense]

Data recorded globally in all parts:

•Tempo

•Time signature

•Reverb type

•Chorus type

• DSP effect type

Yo u can change all data except for note data, Octave

setting or Time Signature after recording.

102 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Questions about Operations and Functions

■ How much data can I record?

•Current memory (page 48): About 300KB

•Storage memory (page 48): About 1,750KB

■ The on/off setting of the pedal connected to

the AUX PEDAL jack is reversed.

Some types of pedals may turn on and off in oppo-

site fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter

(page 88) in the “FUNCTION” menu to change the

external pedal setting.

■ The song title is not correct.

The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than

that used when you named the song. Also, if the song

was recorded on another instrument, the title might

be displayed incorrectly. Use the “CharacterCode”

parameter (page 55) in the FILE/SONG SETTING

menu to change the setting. However, if the song was

recorded on another instrument, changing the

“CharacterCode” parameter setting may not resolve

the problem.

■ What is the difference between “Touch-

Sense” and “TouchResponse” MIDI data?

“TouchSense” determines the manner and degree to

which the volume level changes in response to your

touch on the keyboard. The MIDI note-on velocity

data is not changed. It changes the volume level at

the same velocity data.

“TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity of

an instrument. The MIDI note-on velocity data is

changed when you play the keyboard with a consis-

tent touch.

■ Only “PhraseMark” can be selected via the

[FILE/SONG SETTING] button during song

playback.

The “PhraseMark” parameter can only be set via the

[FILE/SONG SETTING] button during song play-

back. If you desired to select other parameters, stop

the song and try once again.

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 103

Appendix

104 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

The power of the Clavinova does not

turn on.

The power cable is not plugged in

(check at the Clavinova and at the

electrical outlet).

Insert the power cable plug ﬁrmly

into the Clavinova and into the elec-

trical outlet of the correct voltage.

(page 16)

There is a clicking noise when you

press the [POWER] button to turn

the power on or off.

This is caused by the electrical

power within the instrument.

This is not a malfunction.

Noise is heard from the Clavinova. A portable telephone is being used

near the Clavinova (or the ring tone

is sounding).

Turn off the power of the portable

telephone located near the Clavi-

nova. Noise may be heard if a porta-

ble telephone is used near the

Clavinova or if the ring tone occurs.

The overall volume is too low.

Or, there is no sound at all.

The [MASTER VOLUME] dial is low-

ered.

Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

(page 17)

The volume level for the keyboard

performance is set too low.

Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider

toward the keyboard to increase the

keyboard volume.

Headphones are connected (only if

the Speaker setting is “Normal

HeadphoneSW”). (page 90)

Disconnect the headphone plug.

Speaker setting is off. Set [Speaker] to “Normal” or “ON”.

(page 90)

Local Control is turned off. Set Local control ON. (page 92)

“Expression” is assigned to the right

pedal or the AUX pedal.

Assign any function other than

“Expression” to the pedal.

The keyboard volume is lower than

the song playback volume.

The volume level for the keyboard

performance is set too low.

Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider

toward the keyboard to increase the

keyboard volume.

Sound is still heard from the speak-

ers even though headphones are

plugged in.

Speaker setting is On. Set the speaker setting to “Normal

(HeadphoneSW)”. (page 90)

iAFC cannot be turned ON. The lid is closed or open with the

shorter stay.

Open the lid with the longer stay

using the inner recess.

Feedback occurs when you turn

iAFC on.

iAFC was not automatically adjusted

correctly.

Turn iAFC OFF, and perform the

automatic adjustment (page 84)

Damper pedal does not function, or

notes are sustained even though the

damper pedal is not pressed.

The plug of the pedal cable is not

inserted into the [PEDAL] jack.

Plug the pedal cable ﬁrmly into the

[PEDAL] jack. (Refer to “CLP-

295GP: Keyboard Stand Assembly”

beginning on page 111.)

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 105

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

The USB storage device is not rec-

ognized by the instrument.

The USB storage device may not be

recognized by the instrument

depending on the timing of the

device connection or the setting of

the [SELECT] switch.

Disconnect the USB storage device

and connect it again and select a

device using the [SELECT] switch.

To view the data of the USB storage

device on the CLP display, press the

[SONG SELECT] button to engage

song selection mode or press the

[FILE/SONG SETTING] button to

engage ﬁle/song setting mode. If

you try to engage these modes

before connecting the USB storage

device, press the [EXIT] button to

exit the mode and re-engage the

mode. If the device is still not recog-

nized, it may not be supported by

Yamaha. Only use devices sup-

ported by Yamaha (page 62).

The USB storage device has hung

up (stopped).

The USB storage device is not com-

patible with the instrument.

Only use devices whose compatibil-

ity has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha

(page 62).

The USB storage device does not

operate properly.

Disconnect the device and connect

it to the instrument again.

106 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the

data recorded by CLP-295GP, and whether or not the CLP-295GP can playback commercially available song data or

song data created for other instruments or on a computer.

Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem,

or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems

playing back data, please refer to the information below.

Basic Check Points

The data and the MIDI device must match in regards

to the items below.

• Sequence format

•Voice allocation format

•Disk Format (ﬂoppy disk drive is optional)

Sequence Format

The system which records song data is called “sequence

format.”

Playback is only possible when the sequence format of

the disk matches that of the MIDI device.

The CLP-295GP is compatible with the following for-

mats.

■

SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This is the most common sequence format.

• Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one

of two types: Format 0 or Format 1.

•Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format

0, and most commercially available software is

recorded as Format 0.

•The CLP-295GP is compatible with both Format

0 and Format 1.

•Performance data recorded on the CLP-295GP is

saved in the SMF format 0.

■

ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series

instruments. This is a common format used with various

Yamaha software.

Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers,

called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice

allocation format.”

Vo ices may not play back as expected unless the voice

allocation format of the song data matches that of the

compatible MIDI device used for playback.

The CLP-295GP is compatible with the following for-

mats.

■

GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation for-

mats.

Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System

Level 1, as is most commercially available software.

■ GM System Level 2

“GM System Level 2” is a standard speciﬁcation hat

enhances the original “GM System Level 1” and improves

song data compatibility. It provides for increased

polyphony, greater voice selection, expanded voice

parameters, and integrated effect processing.

■ XG

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1

format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally to pro-

vide more voices and variations, as well as greater expres-

sive control over voices and effects, and to ensure

compatibility of data well into the future.

Song data recorded on the CLP-295GP using voices in

the XG category is XG-compatible.

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 107

Appendix

Data Compatibility

■ DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

This voice allocation format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series

instruments.

This is also common format used with various Yamaha

software.

■ GS

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation.

In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhance-

ment of the GM speciﬁcally to provide more voices and

drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expres-

sive control over voices and effects.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the condi-

tions above, the data may still not be completely com-

patible, depending on the speciﬁcations of the devices

and particular data recording methods.

Disk format

It is necessary to ﬁrst conﬁgure the ﬂoppy disk to the

system of the device being used. This operation is

called “formatting.”

•There are two types of ﬂoppy disks: MF2DD (dou-

ble sided, double density) and MF2HD (double

sided, high density), and each type has different for-

matting systems.

• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to

be used is compatible with the format of the disk.

108 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Preset Voice List

: Yes ×: No

Voice

group

Voice name

Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

GRAND

PIANO1

GrandPiano1

This sound was sampled from a full concert grand

piano. Three stages of dynamics were sampled,

and no effort has been spared in making the sound

virtually identical to that of an acoustic piano. Even

the tonal changes produced by the damper pedal

and the subtle sounds of releasing a key are repro-

duced. The sympathetic vibration (string reso-

nance) that occurs between the strings of an

acoustic piano has also been simulated. Suitable

not only for classical compositions but also for piano

pieces of any style.

MellowPiano

A warm and mellow piano sound. Ideal for classical

music.

RockPiano

A bright-sounding piano. Ideal for rock styles.

HonkyTonk

Piano

A honky-tonk style piano. Enjoy a tonal character

that is quite different than a grand piano.

GRAND

PIANO2

GrandPiano2

×××

A spacious and clear piano sound with a bright res-

onance. Ideal for popular music.

BrightPiano

×××

A spacious and bright piano sound. Ideal for popu-

lar and rock music.

E.PIANO1

E.Piano1

×××

An electronic piano sound produced by an FM syn-

thesizer. The tone will change as you vary your

playing touch. Ideal for popular music.

SynthPiano

× ×××

This voice simulates the electric piano sound pro-

duced by synthesizers in popular music. It also

goes well with the acoustic piano sound.

E.PIANO2

E.Piano2

××

The sound of an electric piano using hammer-

struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly,

and an aggressive tone when played hard.

Vintage

E.Piano

×××

A different type of electric piano sound. Widely used

in rock and popular music.

HARPSI

CHORD

Harpsichord

×× ×

The sound of the instrument frequently used in

baroque music. Variations in playing touch will not

affect the volume, and a characteristic sound will be

heard when you release the key.

Harpsichord

8'+4'

×× ×

A harpsichord with an added upper octave. Pro-

duces a more brilliant sound.

E.CLAVI

CHORD

E.Clavichord

×××

This is the voice of a keyboard that produces sound

by striking the strings with magnetic pickups. This

funky sound is popular in black contemporary music.

Because of its unique structure, the instrument pro-

duces a peculiar sound when you release the keys.

Wah Clavi.

×××

A distinctive effect is preset.

VIBRA-

PHONE

Vibraphone

××

Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The

tone becomes more metallic the harder you play.

Marimba

×××

A marimba sound, sampled in stereo for spacious-

ness and realism.

Celesta

××

The sound of a celesta (a percussion instrument in

which hammers strike metallic bars to produce

sound). This instrument is well-known for its

appearance in “Dance of the Sugar-plum Fairies”

from Tchaikovsky’s “Nutcracker Suite.”

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 109

Appendix

Preset Voice List

Voice group Voice name

Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

GUITAR

NylonGuitar

××

A warm and natural nylon-string guitar sound.

Enjoy the atmosphere it adds to a quiet song.

SteelGuitar

× ×××

A bright steel guitar sound. Ideal for popular

music.

CHURCH

ORGAN

PipeOrgan

Principal

××××

This voice features the combination of pipes

(8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument)

organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music.

PipeOrgan

Tutti

××××

This voice features a full coupler of a pipe

organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta

and Fugue by Bach.

PipeOrgan

Flute1

××××

A pipe organ sound that combines ﬂute-type

(woodwind type) stops of different pitches

(8' + 4'). This is a gentle sound that is ideal for

accompanying hymns.

PipeOrgan

Flute2

××××

A pipe organ sound that combines ﬂute-type

(woodwind type) stops of different pitches

(8' + 4' + 1-1/3'). This is brighter than

PipeOrganFlute1, and is suitable for solos.

JAZZORGAN

JazzOrgan

×××××

The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric

organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms.

RotaryOrgan

×××××

A bright electric organ sound.

MellowOrgan

×××××

A mellow electric organ sound. Ideal for

calmer songs.

STRINGS

Strings

×××

Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensem-

ble with realistic reverb. Try combining this

voice with piano in the Dual mode.

SynthStrings

× ×××

A bright and spacious strings sound. Suitable

for sustained parts in the background of an

ensemble.

SlowStrings

×××

The sound of a string ensemble, with a slow

attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with

GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO.

CHOIR

Choir

× ×××

A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creat-

ing rich harmonies in slow pieces.

SlowChoir

× ×××

The sound of a choir with a slow attack. Suit-

able for use in Dual mode with GRAND

PIANO or E.PIANO.

Scat

×××

You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice.

Depending on how hard and what note range

you play, different sounds will be produced.

SYNTH.PAD

SynthPad1

× ×××

A warm, mellow, and spacious synth sound.

Ideal for sustained parts in the background of

an ensemble.

SynthPad2

× ×××

A clear and spacious synth sound. Ideal for

sustained parts in the background of an

ensemble.

WOOD BASS

WoodBass

×××

The sound of a ﬁnger-plucked upright bass.

Frequently used in jazz and Latin music.

Bass&Cymbal

×××

The sound of a cymbal has been layered onto

the bass. Effective when used for jazz walk-

ing-bass lines.

E.BASS

ElectricBass

× ×××

The sound of an electric bass. Frequently

used in jazz, rock, and popular music.

FretlessBass

× ×××

The sound of a fretless bass. Suitable for

styles such as jazz and fusion.

110 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Voice Combination Examples

(Dual and Split)

Dual

Split

Dual + Split

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1

GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2

This combination is often used in popular music.

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound.

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2 This combination sounds as if you are playing

two notes that are one octave apart. It is suitable

for the accompaniment of Salsa music.

MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir This is suitable for romantic ballads.

MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + E.Clavichord This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul

music.

MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings This combination is very suitable for Baroque

music.

MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs This combination adds strings and bell sound. A

delay effect is automatically applied.

MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 / WoodBass

or Bass&Cymbal

This is recommended for light Jazz music. The

damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned

to the right-hand range.

MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute

song.

MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1 Play these voices elegantly along with piano

arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords

would be more effective.

MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz

chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding

a variety of expressions.

MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create

an interesting sound.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 + SynthString /

GrandPiano1

This combination creates the thick sound of a

layered piano and strings.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 /

ElectricBass

This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb

and chorus (page 79) will improve the groove.

The damper pedal is effective on the voice

assigned to the right-hand range.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings /

Harpsichord8' + Strings

This combination makes a very brilliant sound.

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 111

Appendix

CLP-295GP: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

•Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install

all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble

in accordance with the sequence given below.

•Assembly should be carried out by at least two per-

sons.

•Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated

below. Use of incorrect screws can damage the

stand.

•Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing the

assembly of each unit.

•To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given

below.

The CLP-295GP features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field

Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker

located on the bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the

reverberation and spaciousness of the sound when you open

the lid with the longer stay (page 15).

In order to optimize the iAFC effect, please observe the fol-

lowing:

•Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the

power of the Clavinova for the ﬁrst time, and after each

time you re-locate the Clavinova. (page 84)

• Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the

Clavinova.

1. Remove all parts from the box. Con-

ﬁrm that all parts shown in the illus-

tration are included.

Main unit

How to position the main unit

Spread a large soft cloth, such as a blanket, on the ﬂoor.

Place the unit on the cloth with the key cover closed

and the keyboard side on the bottom and lean the unit

against the wall so that the unit will not fall or slip.

Place a soft cloth against the wall to protect the instru-

ment and the wall from scratches.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

TIP

Lean the unit against the

wall as shown at right.

Lean the unit against the

wall as shown at right.

Legs Pedal box

6 × 40 mm ﬁxing screws

× 12

AC power cord

Cord holder

6 × 20 mm ﬁxing screws

× 4

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom.

CAUTION

Do not place the main unit with

the rear side facing down.

CAUTION

Do not lay the main unit upside

down on the ﬂoor.

CAUTION

Do not position the main unit so

that its bottom is in contact with

ﬂoor.

112 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Appendix

2. Attach two front legs and a rear leg.

Refer to the diagram below to verify the orientation of

the legs.

Install and tighten four 6 x 40 mm screws on each leg,

starting with one of the front legs.

3. Install the pedal box.

1 Remove the twist tie that afﬁxes the pedal

cord to the upper portion of the pedal box.

2 Align the cord with the groove on the unit,

and attach the pedal box using four

6 x 20 mm

screws.

3 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal

connector. Insert the plug so the arrow side

faces front (toward the keyboard).

If the plug will not go in easily, do not

force it. Double-check the orientation of

the plug, then try again.

4 Attach the cord holder on the unit as shown

in the illustration below, then use the cord

holder to afﬁx the pedal cord.

4. Raising the unit to the standing posi-

tion.

Use the front legs as support to raise the unit.

Rear leg

Front leg Front leg

Twist tie

CAUTION

•Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

•When you raise the unit, do not hold the key

cover.

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 113

Appendix

5. Connect the power cord.

Insert the AC power cord plug into the [AC INLET].

6. Set the adjuster.

Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm contact with

the ﬂoor surface.

After completing the assembly, please check the following.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting

of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To

set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main volt-

ages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial

so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to

the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at

240V when the unit is initially shipped.

After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the

AC power cord to the [AC INLET] and an AC wall outlet.

A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to

match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in

your area.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to

the Clavinova or result in improper operation.

240

127

110

220

For models that feature

a voltage selector:

Set the voltage selector to an

appropriate voltage.

Right leg on the bottom of the main unit, when

viewed from front

• Are there any parts left over?

→ Review the assembly procedure and correct

any errors.

•Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other mov-

able ﬁxtures?

→ Move the Clavinova to an appropriate loca-

tion.

•Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when

you shake it?

→ Tighten all screws.

•Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you

step on the pedals?

→ Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly

against the ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted

securely into the sockets?

→ Check the connection.

•If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady

when you play on the keyboard, refer to the

assembly diagrams and retighten all screws.

When moving the instrument after assembly,

always hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion.

Improper handling can result in damage to the

instrument or personal injury.

Top portion

Key cover

114 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks (Optional)

An optional ﬂoppy disk drive can be installed to this

instrument. For instructions on installing the ﬂoppy disk

drive, see page 115.

The ﬂoppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve cre-

ated on the instrument to ﬂoppy disk, and allows you to load

data from ﬂoppy disk to the instrument.

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive with

care. Follow the important precautions below.

Floppy Disk Compatibility

• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

Formatting a Floppy Disk

•If you ﬁnd that you are unable to use new, blank disks or

old disks that have been used with other devices, you may

need to format them. For details on how to format a disk,

see page 54. Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be

lost after formatting. Make sure to check beforehand

whether or not the disk contains important data.

Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be use-

able as is on other devices.

Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks

Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive:

Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and

the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot.

Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the

way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out.

Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk drive.

Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or ﬂoppy

disks.

Removing a Floppy Disk

•After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the

ﬂoppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the ﬂoppy disk

drive is off), ﬁrmly press the eject button at the upper

right of the disk slot all the way in.

When the ﬂoppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If

the ﬂoppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck, do

not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject button

again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to eject it

again.

*Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as

recording, playback, or deletion of data.

If a ﬂoppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk

is automatically accessed, since the instrument checks

whether the disk has data.

CAUTION

Do not remove the ﬂoppy disk or turn off the instrument itself

while the disk is being accessed.

Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also

damage to the ﬂoppy disk drive.

•Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt

that can cause data-read and -write errors.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

•Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually

cause read and write errors.

•To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-avail-

able dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about

once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the avail-

ability of proper head cleaning disks.

About Floppy Disks

Handle ﬂoppy disks with care, and follow

these precautions:

•Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy disks

in their protective cases when they are not in use.

•Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high

or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liq-

uids.

•Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

•Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as those

produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since

magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase data on

the disk, rendering it unreadable.

•Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing.

•Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to

a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in

the proper location.

To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab):

•To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the

disk's write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open).

When saving data, make sure that the disk’s write-protect

tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed).

write-protect tab open

(protect position)

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 115

Appendix

Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional)

The optional UD-FD01 ﬂoppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included

ﬂoppy disk drive case and screws.

1. Remove the three backing papers

from the adhesive tape in the case,

and ﬁt the ﬂoppy disk drive into the

case.

2. Fold the USB cable inside the case as

shown.

3. Attach the drive and case assembly

to the left underside of the instru-

ment, using the included four screws

(4mm x 10mm).

4. Connect the USB cable to the USB

[TO DEVICE] terminal.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

Insert the drive to the case, with the side

having the rubber stoppers facing the case.

Dual-sided adhesive tape

116 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Speciﬁcations

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change

or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the same

in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Item CLP-295GP

Keyboard

Natural Wood keyboard

(real wood on white keys only)

Sound Source

AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

Polyphony (max)

128

Voice Selection

Panel preset for manual performance: 38 voices,

XG voices: 480 voices + 12 drum kits,

GM2 and GS voices for GM2/GS song playback

Effect

Reverb, Chorus, Brilliance, Variation effect, Insertion effect x 3, iAFC

Controls

Dual, Split

Display

LCD

Recording/Playback

16-track recording/playback, tempo adjustment

Memory Device

Optional USB storage device (via USB TO DEVICE terminal)

Flash memory (internal): 1.7 MB

Pedal

Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft

Demo Songs

16 voice demo songs, 50 preset songs

Jacks/Terminals

MIDI (IN/OUT/THRU), PHONES x 2, AUX IN (L/L+R, R), AUX OUT (L, R),

USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE, AUX PEDAL

Main Amplﬁers

60W x 2 + 20W x 2

Speakers

16cm x 2, 5cm x 2, 3cm (DOME) x 2, 10cm x 2

Dimensions (W x D x H)

(Lid up)

1,434 mm x 1,146 mm x 931 mm

[56 1/2" x 45 1/8" x 36 2/3"]

With music rest:

(1,434 mm x 1,146 mm x 1,581 mm)

[56 1/2" x 45 1/8" x 62 1/4"]

Weight

108kg [238 lbs., 2 oz]

Accessories

“50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection, Owner’s Manual, Data List,

Bench (included or optional depending on locale), Accessory CD-ROM

for Windows, Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide

CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 117

Appendix

Index

You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words.

The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column.

Numerics

50 greats for the Piano ............................... 5

50 Piano Preset Songs .............................. 22

Practicing a one-hand part................ 24

A – D [–][+] buttons ............................... 12

A-B repeat................................................. 26

Accessories.................................................. 5

Adding variation to the sound

➔ Effect

function..................................................... 29

Application Index....................................... 8

Assembly................................................. 111

Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE]

function to a pedal ................................... 89

AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks ...................... 61

AUX OUT [L] [R] jacks........................... 61

[AUX PEDAL] jack .................................. 60

Auxiliary pedal function .......................... 88

Backup ................................................ 93, 94

Bench .......................................................... 5

BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/[BRIGHT]

buttons...................................................... 29

Calibration................................................ 84

Center pedal.............................................. 28

Center pedal function .............................. 87

CharacterCode.......................................... 55

Characters................................................. 55

[CHORUS] button................................... 30

combining two voices

➔ Dual mode...... 31

Connection

Audio.................................................. 61

computer............................................ 65

Other Components............................ 60

Speaker ............................................... 61

USB [TO HOST] ............................... 65

[CONTRAST] knob................................. 17

CONTRAST*............................................ 17

Copy.......................................................... 51

Current memory ...................................... 45

Current song............................................. 45

Damper (right) pedal............................... 28

Data Compatibility................................. 106

Data type................................................... 59

Default (Normal) setting* ....................... 29

Delete ........................................................ 49

[DEMO] button ....................................... 20

Demonstration tunes ............................... 20

Detailed Settings....................................... 68

Function ............................................. 85

iAFC.................................................... 83

Metronome ........................................ 76

recording and playback ..................... 73

voices .................................................. 77

display ....................................................... 12

Display contrast........................................ 17

DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)......... 107

DOWN (TEMPO)

50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 23

metronome......................................... 35

Driver ........................................................ 65

Dual

Detailed settings................................. 77

Recording ........................................... 44

Dual mode

➔ combining two voices...... 31

Effect function .......................................... 29

equalizer.................................................... 81

ESEQ ....................................................... 106

[EXIT] button........................................... 13

External song ............................................ 45

[EXTRA PARTS] button.................... 36, 41

FactorySet ................................................. 93

Fast forward ........................................ 23, 57

FILE* ......................................................... 45

[FILE/SONG SETTING] button ....... 45, 73

Floppy Disk..................................... 114, 115

Floppy Disk Drive .................................. 115

Format....................................................... 54

[FUNCTION] button ........................ 70, 85

GM System Level 1 ................................. 106

GM System Level 2 ................................. 106

GS ............................................................ 107

Headphones.............................................. 17

hub ............................................................ 62

iAFC

iAFC Detailed settings ....................... 83

[iAFC SETTING] button ................... 69, 83

Jacks

AUX IN............................................... 61

AUX OUT........................................... 61

AUX PEDAL....................................... 60

PHONES.............................................17

key cover....................................................14

KeyOffSampling........................................ 90

LCD ➔ Screen

Contrast .............................................. 17

[LEFT] button............................... 24, 36, 41

Left pedal................................................... 28

Left pedal function ................................... 87

Lid..............................................................15

List

Demonstration tunes ......................... 20

Detailed Settings.................................68

Message............................................... 95

Preset Voice ...................................... 108

M ............................................................... 46

MakeDir .................................................... 54

[MASTER VOLUME] dial ....................... 17

MASTER VOLUME* ...............................17

MEMORY ................................................. 57

Memory..................................................... 45

Memory song............................................45

MemoryBackup ........................................ 93

Message List .............................................. 95

METRONOME [ON/OFF] button .........35

METRONOME [SETTING] button.. 68, 76

MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] terminals ...... 60

MIDI cables............................................... 66

Midi settings.............................................. 70

MIDI terminals.........................................66

Move..........................................................53

MP .............................................................46

MS..............................................................46

Ms .............................................................. 46

Music braces ............................................. 14

Music Data................................................56

Music rest.................................................. 14

New Song .................................................. 36

Normal setting* ........................................29

Index

118 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Other settings ........................................... 85

P ................................................................ 46

Parameter List........................................... 68

Pedal Function

Auxiliary............................................. 88

Center................................................. 87

Left...................................................... 87

Right ................................................... 87

Pedals ........................................................ 28

Personal computer ................................... 65

[PHONES] jacks....................................... 17

PhraseMark............................................... 73

PLAY/PAUSE

50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 22

Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 57

[PLAY/PAUSE] button ...................... 22, 57

Playback

50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 22

Demo Songs ....................................... 21

Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 57

Playing back repeatedly (song)................ 73

playing two voices

➔ Split mode ............ 33

[POWER] switch...................................... 16

Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset songs)

PRESET..................................................... 57

50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 22

Preset song memory................................. 45

Preset Voice List ..................................... 108

[REC] button............................................ 37

Recording

Tape Recorder.................................... 61

Recording in Dual .................................... 44

Recording in Split..................................... 44

Recording Your Performance.................. 36

Rename ..................................................... 50

[REPEAT] button..................................... 25

Repeat Playback........................................ 25

Re-recording a song partially................... 39

[REVERB] button .................................... 30

Rewind ................................................ 23, 57

[RIGHT] button........................... 24, 36, 41

Right pedal................................................ 28

Right pedal function ................................ 87

RIGHT/LEFT

50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 24

Save............................................................ 48

Scale........................................................... 86

Select

50 piano preset songs......................... 22

Demo Songs ....................................... 21

Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 56

[SELECT] switch ...................................... 63

Selecting a touch response ....................... 85

SMF (Standard MIDI File) .................... 106

Soft (left) pedal ......................................... 28

Song

Data Type ........................................... 59

Detailed settings................................. 73

Playing back repeatedly ..................... 73

[SONG BALANCE] slider........................ 44

SONG SELECT

Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 56

[SONG SELECT] button ................... 22, 56

SongAutoOpen......................................... 55

Sostenuto (center) pedal .......................... 28

Sound

brilliance............................................. 29

expression........................................... 29

reverberation...................................... 30

spread and spaciousness .................... 30

Soundboard reverb................................... 30

Split

Detailed settings................................. 77

Recording ........................................... 44

[SPLIT] button ......................................... 33

Split mode

➔ playing two voices ............ 33

Split point ................................................. 34

Splitting the keyboard range and playing

two different voices .................................. 33

STOP

50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 23

Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 58

[STOP] button.................................... 23, 58

Storage memory ....................................... 45

StringResonance ....................................... 90

SustainSampling ....................................... 90

Sync Start

50 preset songs ................................... 24

Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 57

TEMPO

50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 23

metronome......................................... 35

Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 58

TEMPO [UP] [DOWN] buttons............. 35

Terminals

MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] ........ 60, 66

USB [TO DEVICE]............................60

USB [TO HOST]................................ 60

TouchResponse.........................................85

Transpose..................................................85

Troubleshooting ..................................... 104

Tune ..........................................................86

Type of characters.....................................55

Type of data (recorded).......................... 101

U1 ..............................................................46

U1P............................................................ 46

U1S ............................................................46

U1s.............................................................46

UP (TEMPO)

50 Piano Preset Songs ........................23

metronome......................................... 35

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal ...................60

USB [TO HOST] terminal .......................60

USB storage device ...................................62

USB1.......................................................... 57

Voice group buttons........................... 27, 33

[VOICE SETTING] button................ 69, 77

Voices* ......................................................27

Detailed settings .................................77

Volume

Balance (SONG BLANCE) ................44

Setting ................................................. 17

XG............................................................ 106

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,

basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-

cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ-

ing connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Veriﬁcation: Yamaha products are

manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your

dealer for supply voltage veriﬁcation and (if applicable) instruc-

tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.

For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the

Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one

blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug

into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem

persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet

replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies

or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power

supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,

on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect-

ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-

mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire

size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the

AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless speciﬁcally

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations

that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for

enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that

unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not signiﬁcantly contribute to

their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to

heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices

that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.

Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool,

spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected

from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for

extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected

when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical

storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are

not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualiﬁed service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain: or

d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that

described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic-

ing should be referred to qualiﬁed service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an

ampliﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss.

DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level

or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing

loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory

mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied as a part of the product

or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be

dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are

stable and any optional ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well

secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are

designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(2 wires)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music

(U.K.) Ltd.

(polarity)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music

Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada

Musique Ltée.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-

zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual,

may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-

ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden-

tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured

RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter-

minal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH

WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-

TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE

LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA

PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,

Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Electronic Piano

Model Name : CLP-295GP

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception

is suspected.

(FCC DoC)

MEMO

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria, CEE Department

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0660

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor

Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan

Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

[CL] 38

Printed in Indonesia

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WH31750 607MWAP?.?-01A0

Clavinova Web site (English only)

http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Documenttranscriptie

CLP-295GP OWNER'S MANUAL Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS„ on pages 3-4. IMPORTANT —Check your power supply— Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual. EN Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 CLP-295GP Model Serial No. Purchase Date PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Assembly • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. (1)B-11 1/2 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 3 Connections Using the bench (If included) • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • In the case of a model with a polished finish, gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument's finish. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. Saving data Saving and backing up your data • Current data (page 45) is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument before saving. Save the data to a USB storage device/external device such as a computer. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device/external device such as a computer. • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • In the case of a model with a polished finish, bumping the surface of the instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel. Use caution. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. 4 (1)B-11 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 2/2 Introduction Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-295GP. In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also, a separate “Data List” is provided. Introduction: Please read this section first. In the “Application Index” section on page 8 and “Features” on page 10, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations. Basic Operation: This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 101, or the “Index” on page 117. Detailed Settings: This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Refer to this section as necessary. Appendix: Data List: This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference material. XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. • The models CLP-295GP will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Copying of commercially available software or music data for purposes other than your personal use is strictly prohibited. COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software and MIDI files, etc. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. Trademarks • • • • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. After transporting the instrument, do the following to ensure optimum performance of the iAFC function (page 83): • Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova. • Perform the automatic adjustment of the iAFC function (page 84). Included Accessories • “50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection • Owner’s Manual • Data List • Bench (included or optional depending on locale) • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 5 Table of contents Introduction Introduction.......................................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 3 About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .................................................................................................................... 5 Included Accessories ....................................................................................................................................................... 5 Application Index ................................................................................................................................... 8 Panel Controls and Terminals.............................................................................................................. 10 Introduction to the Controls................................................................................................................ 12 Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 14 About the key cover ...................................................................................................................................................... 14 About the music rest ..................................................................................................................................................... 14 About the music braces................................................................................................................................................. 14 About the Lid ................................................................................................................................................................ 15 Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 16 Adjusting the display contrast ...................................................................................................................................... 17 Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 17 Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 17 Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment ............................................................................................................... 18 Basic Operation .................................................. 19 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 20 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 22 Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 22 Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs ....................................................................................................... 24 Practicing with the Repeat Playback function and the preset songs .......................................................................... 25 Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 27 Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 27 Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 28 Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 29 Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 31 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 33 Using the metronome ................................................................................................................................................... 35 Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 36 Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 36 Recording a performance without specifying the recording part .............................................................................. 37 Recording a performance of several different parts ................................................................................................... 41 Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 42 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]................................................... 45 Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save] ........................................................................................... 48 Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a USB storage device ... [Delete].......................... 49 Renaming files ... [Rename] ......................................................................................................................................... 50 Copying files ... [Copy] ................................................................................................................................................. 51 Moving files ... [Move].................................................................................................................................................. 53 6 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Introduction Making folders in the USB storage device ... [MakeDir] ............................................................................................ 54 Formatting a USB storage device ... [Format] ............................................................................................................. 54 Automatically selecting a song in storage media ... [SongAutoOpen]....................................................................... 55 Changing the type of characters on screen ... [CharacterCode]................................................................................. 55 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data............................................. 56 Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 56 Turning part playback on and off ................................................................................................................................ 59 Supported song data type ............................................................................................................................................. 59 Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 60 Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 60 Connecting to a USB storage device ............................................................................................................................ 62 Connecting a personal computer ................................................................................................................................. 65 Detailed Settings ................................................ 67 Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 68 Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 68 Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 71 Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] ................................................ 73 Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] ........................................................ 76 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] .............................................................................. 77 Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING] .......................................................................................... 83 Other settings [FUNCTION] ................................................................................................................. 85 Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 95 Questions about Operations and Functions ...................................................................................... 101 Appendix .......................................................... 103 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................. 104 Data Compatibility ............................................................................................................................. 106 Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................. 108 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................. 110 CLP-295GP: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................................................................................. 111 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks (Optional) ............................................... 114 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional)....................................................................................... 115 Specifications ..................................................................................................................................... 116 Index................................................................................................................................................... 117 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 7 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Introduction Listening Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 20 “Playing the 50 Piano Preset Songs” on page 22 Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 20 Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Piano” ............. “Playing the 50 Piano Preset Songs” on page 22 Listening to my recorded performance ..................................“Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data” on page 56 Listening to songs in the USB storage device ..................“Connecting to a USB storage device” on page 62 “Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data” on page 56 Playing Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 28 Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ....................... “Changing the key [Transpose]” on page 85 Changing tonal color Viewing the list of voices ................................................................................ “Preset Voice List” on page 108 Simulating a concert hall........................................................................................... “[REVERB]” on page 30 Combining two voices ..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 31 Playing different sounds with left and right hands ........................... “Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 33 Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 29 Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 30 Making the sound three-dimensional .............. “Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING]” on page 83 Practicing Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 24 Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 35 Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 36 “Turning part playback on and off ” on page 59 Recording Recording your performance ...................................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 36 Deleting or copying the recorded songs ..................................... “Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]” on page 45 8 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Application Index Introduction Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Settings Making detailed settings for recording and playback .................................. “Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING]” on page 73 Making detailed settings for the metronome ......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 76 Making detailed settings for the voices ................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 77 Making detailed settings for the Clavinova ............................... “Other settings [FUNCTION]” on page 85 Connecting the Clavinova to other devices What is MIDI?......................................................................................................... “About MIDI” on page 60 Making detailed settings for MIDI “Setting the MIDI transmit channel” – “Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI” on pages 91 – 92 Recording your performance ....................................................... “AUX OUT [L] [R] Pin jacks” on page 61 Raising the volume ........................................................................ “AUX OUT [L] [R] Pin jacks” on page 61 Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova .......... “AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] jacks” on page 61 Connecting to a USB storage device................................“Connecting to a USB storage device” on page 62 Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 65 Assembling Assemble/disassemble the Clavinova....................... “CLP-295GP: Keyboard Stand Assembly” on page 111 Quick solution What the Clavinova offers............................................................................... “Application Index” on page 8 “Panel Controls and Terminals” on page 10 Returning to the main screen................................................................................. “EXIT button” on page 13 Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting ................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 93 Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 95 If you have questions about operations and functions ............................................................................ “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 101 Troubleshooting............................................................................................. “Troubleshooting” on page 104 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals Introduction The Yamaha CLP-295GP Clavinova offers unmatched sonic realism and exceptionally natural grand-piano type playability, and features Yamaha’s original AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling technology for rich, authentic, musical voices. The special Natural Wood keyboard uses real wood white keys, to reproduce as closely as possible the experience of playing an actual acoustic grand piano. Thanks to these two keyboard types, you can use performance techniques previously possible only on grand pianos—such as playing the same note successively and having sounds blend smoothly even without use of the damper pedal, or playing the same key quickly and having perfect articulation without the sound cutting off unnaturally. The remarkably authentic Grand Piano 1 voice on both instruments also features: • Dynamic Sampling, using velocity-switched samples for extra realism; • String Resonance (page 90), which recreates the rich resonance of piano strings; • Sustain Sampling (page 90), which uses samples of the resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings made when the damper pedal is pressed; and • Keyoff Samples, which add the subtle, characteristic sounds produced when keys are released. 2 3 SONG MIN 4 6 LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD MAX SONG BALANCE DEMO ! # METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF EXTRA PARTS DOWN SYNC START NEW SONG MASTER VOLUME 9 UP TEMPO C SONG 5 7 ) 8 @ $ # CONTRAST B NO YES A & GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT ( ¡ iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT D VOICE Top panel % ^ * º ™ £ 1 SELECT USB TO DEVICE ¢ ‚ ª ∞ Jacks & Terminals £ 10 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual § ¶ • Panel Controls and Terminals Adjust the volume level using this dial. 3 [SONG BALANCE] slider . . . . . . . . . page 44 This lets you adjust the volume balance between the song playback and the sound you are playing on the keyboard. 4 [DEMO] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 20 Demonstration playback is available for each voice. 5 [REPEAT] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25 For repeatedly playing back a single song or specifying a range (in beats) within a song for repeated playback. 6 [RIGHT], [LEFT], [EXTRA PARTS] buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .pages 24, 36, 41 For turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. 7 [REC] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 36 For recording your keyboard performance. 8 [PLAY/PAUSE], [STOP] buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .pages 22, 56 For playing back the preset songs, your recorded material or commercially available music data, etc. 9 [SONG SELECT] button . . . . . . .pages 22, 56 For selecting a song to play back or edit. ) [FILE/SONG SETTING] button . . . pages 45, 73 For saving recorded songs and managing song files. Also lets you make detailed settings for song recording and playback. ! METRONOME [ON/OFF], METRONOME [SETTING] buttons . . . . . . .pages 35, 68, 76 For using the metronome functions. @ TEMPO [UP][DOWN] buttons. . . . . page 35 For changing the tempo (speed) of the song and metronome. # A – D [–][+] buttons, Display. . . . . . page 12 $ [CONTRAST] knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17 For adjusting the display contrast. % [EXIT] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13 Pressing this button returns to the main operation display (the one shown when the power is turned on). ^ Voice group buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . page 27 For choosing voice groups. Sixteen groups of voices, including grand piano, are available. You can also combine two voices and use them together. & [VOICE SETTING] button . . . . .pages 69, 77 For making detailed changes to the voice sound and effects. * [SPLIT] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 33 For playing different voices on the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard. ( [REVERB], [CHORUS] buttons . . . . . page 30 º BRILLIANCE [MELLOW][BRIGHT] buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29 For adjusting the brightness of the sound. ¡ [iAFC SETTING] button . . . . . . pages 69, 83 When iAFC is engaged, the Clavinova will sound deeper, more resonant, and more similar to the sound of an actual acoustic instrument. You can turn the iAFC function on or off or make detailed settings for the iAFC. Introduction 1 [POWER] switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16 2 [MASTER VOLUME] dial . . . . . . . . . page 17 In order to obtain the optimal results from iAFC, we recommend that you do the following. • Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova. • Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the first time, and after each time you move the Clavinova (page 84). ™ [FUNCTION] button. . . . . . . . . pages 70, 85 This lets you make detailed settings, such as adjusting the keyboard touch, making fine adjustments to the pitch or MIDI settings. £ USB [TO DEVICE] terminals . . . . . . page 60 For connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, allowing saving/loading of data to and from the connected device. The instrument has two [TO DEVICE] terminals, A and B, which can be specified using the [SELECT] switch. ¢ Soft pedal (left), Sostenuto pedal (center), Damper pedal (right) . . . . . . . . . . . page 28 For producing a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. These pedals can also be assigned to various functions. ∞ [PHONES] jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17 For connecting a set of standard stereo headphones, allowing private practice. § USB [TO HOST] terminal . . . . . . . . . page 60 For connecting the instrument to your computer, allowing you to transfer MIDI data between the Clavinova and the computer. ¶ MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] terminals . . page 60 For connecting external MIDI devices, allowing the use of various MIDI functions. • [AUX PEDAL] jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 60 For connecting an optional pedal, allowing convenient foot control over one of a variety of assignable functions. ª AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks . . . . . . . . . page 61 For connecting an external tone generator, allowing you to play the sound of that device via the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. ‚ AUX OUT [L][R] jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . page 61 For outputting the sound of the Clavinova to an external audio system, or connecting it to another device (cassette tape recorder, etc.) to record your performance. For adding reverb and chorus effects to the sound. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 11 Introduction to the Controls Introduction This instrument has many buttons and controls—so many that you may feel overwhelmed at first. However, once you understand the basic operations, you’ll find the instrument is very easy to use. Press the button corresponding to the function you want to use. The buttons are the means of entrance to the functions. For example, when you want to change a voice, you simply press one of the voice group buttons on the right of the panel, or when you want to listen to a preset song, press the [SONG SELECT] button on the left of the panel. For the functions that are assigned to each button, see “Panel Controls and Terminals” on page 10. GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE When you press a button, related content or parameter is shown in the display. For example, when you press a voice button, the voice name is shown, or when you press the [SONG SELECT] button, a song name is shown on the display. After pressing a button, check the display for the indication. A B Grand Piano 1 NO C YES D Selecting items/parameters with the buttons on the side of the display. Each function may have many items or parameters from which you can choose. To select an item or parameter, press one of the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons. Each parameter in the display corresponds to the A [–][+] – D [–][+] button next to it. A B GrandPiano1 Vibraphone C 12 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Harpsi.8' WoodBass NO YES D Introduction Introduction to the Controls ■ To reset the values or parameters, press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously. If you’ve changed the parameter values or settings, you may wan to reset them to their normal condition. To do this, simply press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously. B A MetronomeVolume NO YES 100 D C The TEMPO and BRILLIANCE buttons are the same shape as the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons. You can reset the related values or parameters by simultaneously pressing buttons of this shape. ■ To execute or cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] button. When a prompt is shown on the upper right of the display, press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] button to execute or cancel the operation. NO: cancel YES: execute A B Save Overwrite?--> M-001:NewSong001.MID NO C YES D Press the [EXIT] button to exit from a function. The [EXIT] button is the means to “leave” a function. After you’ve used a function and want to exit from it, press the [EXIT] button. SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG [EXIT] button CONTRAST B NO YES EXIT D CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 13 Before Using the Clavinova Introduction About the key cover To open the key cover: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. To close the key cover: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and the unit. Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. About the music rest To raise the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music rest. 3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports. To lower the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest). 3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. CAUTION Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way down. About the music braces These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place. To open 14 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual To close Introduction About the Lid One long stay and one short stay are provided on the lid. Use one of them to open the lid to the desired angle. Longer stay Shorter stay NOTE For the longer stay, use the inner recess, and for the shorter stay, use the outer recess to support the lid. To open the lid: 1. Raise and hold the right side of the lid (viewed from the keyboard end of the instrument). 2. Raise the lid stay and carefully lower the lid so that the end of the stay fits into the recess in the lid. 1 2 To turn on the iAFC (page 83), open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay, the iAFC will not be turned on. 1 To close the lid: 1. Hold the lid stay and carefully raise the lid. 2. Hold the lid in its raised position and lower the lid stay. 3. Carefully lower the lid. 2 3 CAUTION • Make sure that the end of the stay fits securely in the lid recess. If the stay is not properly seated in the recess, the lid may fall, causing damage or injury. • Be careful that you or others do not bump the stay while the lid is raised. The stay may be bumped out of the lid recess causing the lid to fall. • Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children's) when raising or lowering the lid. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 15 Before Using the Clavinova Turning the power on 1. Connect the power cable. Introduction First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 1-1 1-2 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) (bottom surface) WARNING! Make sure your CLP-295GP is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-295GP. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-295GP may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify the plug provided with the CLP-295GP. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. 2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova. Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on. • The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. POWER A B Grand Piano 1 C NO YES D When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name appears on the screen. Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova. • The screen and the power indicator turn off. 16 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual TIP Power indicator If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is still on. Before Using the Clavinova Adjusting the display contrast You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD. TERMINOLOGY CONTRAST B Use this knob. NO YES EXIT C Introduction A CONTRAST: difference between brightness and darkness D Setting the volume To adjust the volume, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial located at the left of the panel. Play the keyboard to actually produce sound while you adjust the volume. The level decreases. The level increases. MIN TERMINOLOGY CAUTION Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. MAX MASTER VOLUME MASTER VOLUME: The volume level of the entire keyboard sound TIP You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level, AUX [IN] input level and the AUX [OUT] output level (when “Variable” is selected in “AuxOutLevel” on page 91) using the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. Using headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. When the headphones are plugged into either of the [PHONES] jacks, the internal speaker system is automatically shut off. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.) CAUTION Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. TIP Optional headphones HPE-160 Yamaha headphones. Using the Headphone Hanger A headphone hanger is included in the CLP-295GP package so that you can hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 × 10mm) as shown in the figure. CAUTION Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Otherwise, the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 17 Introduction Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment The CLP-295GP features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound when you open the lid with the longer stay. (page 15) In order to optimize the iAFC effect, perform the automatic adjustment. (page 83) 18 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual . Basic Operation CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 19 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes For each voice group, the Clavinova contains one demo song that shows off the character of the voices. This section explains how to listen to the demo songs for the voice groups listed below. Demonstration tunes Basic Operation Voice group Tunes GRAND PIANO1 HARPSICHORD Composer “Eintritt” Waldszenen Op. 82 Gavotte R.Schumann J.S.Bach The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts the original compositions. All other songs are original (©2005 Yamaha Corporation). 2 1 3 SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF CONTRAST B A NO DOWN YES UP Voice group buttons GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO D C VOICE SONG Procedure 1. Engage the demo mode. TERMINOLOGY Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode. The indicators of the voice group buttons will blink in succession. A B VoiceDemo SelectVoiceButton C 20 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual NO YES D Mode: A mode is a status under which you can execute a certain function. In demo mode, you can play back demonstration tunes. Listening to the Demonstration Tunes Select a tune and start playback. Press the voice group button for the demo song that you want to hear. The indicator of the voice group button you pressed will light, and the demo song will begin playing. Subsequently, the demo songs will play back consecutively from the upper left voice group button until you stop the playback. 3. Stop the playback and exit from demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button. By holding down the [DEMO] button and pressing the A [+] button to get the “Piano Demo” display, you can hear the piano demo/ iAFC demo. The piano demo lets you compare the result of enabling/disabling each sampling technology. The iAFC demo lets you compare the result of turning iAFC on/off. The demo songs are assigned to the voice group buttons as follows. TIP To adjust the volume level of the demo songs, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. TIP To adjust the volume balance between the song playback and the sound you are playing on the keyboard, use the [SONG BALANCE] slider (page 44). Basic Operation 2. TIP You can also exit from demo mode by pressing the [EXIT] or [STOP] button. GRAND PIANO1..... Stereo Piano (stereo sampling) GRAND PIANO2..... Mono Piano (mono sampling) E.PIANO1 ............... mezzo piano (dynamic sampling, mezzo piano) E.PIANO2 ............... mezzo forte (dynamic sampling, mezzo forte) HARPSICHORD...... forte (dynamic sampling, forte) E.CLAVICHORD ..... with Sustain (with sustain sampling) VIBRAPHONE......... no Sustain (without sustain sampling) GUITAR .................. with KeyOff (with key-off sampling) CHURCH ORGAN .. no KeyOff (without key-off sampling) JAZZ ORGAN......... with StringRes (with string resonance) STRINGS ................ no StringRes (without string resonance) CHOIR .................... with iAFC SYNTH.PAD............ no iAFC CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 21 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 22) or use them for practice (page 24). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Piano” booklet that contains the scores for 50 piano preset songs. Basic Operation Playing the 50 piano preset songs 1 SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG 32 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] button 4 Procedure 1. Select a song. TERMINOLOGY If “PRESET” does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up “PRESET.” Press the C [–][+] buttons to select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050. Song select screen A Song: On the Clavinova, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes. B PRESET BAR 001 P-001:Invention 1 NO YES TIP C D The song number appears on the display. 2. Play a preset song. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. the number of measures A B PRESET BAR 015 P-001:Invention 1 C NO YES D • [-----: NewSong] is a blank song provided for you to record your performance (page 36). • You can repeatedly play back a single song or specify a range (in beats) within a song for repeated playback by using the [REPEAT] button (page 25). Use the “SongRepeat” parameter in the [FILE/SONG SETTING] menu to repeat playback of all songs (page 73). TIP You can play the keyboard along with the preset song playback. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. TIP Use the D [–][+] buttons to scroll through the song name, if the name does not fit in the display. 22 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Adjusting the tempo A B Tempo NO YES 86 C 3. TIP You can also use the D [–][+] buttons to change the tempo. TIP Basic Operation You can use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen. Resetting the tempo Whenever you select a new preset song, the tempo is automatically reset to the song’s original value. D Stop the song playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. Fast forward and rewind You can perform the following operations in the song select screen: • Use the B [–][+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the song while the song is played or stopped. • Press the C [–] button during playback to start playback from the previous song. • Press the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. • Press the [STOP] button or simultaneously press the B [–][+] buttons during playback or while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. 4. Return to the default screen. Press the [EXIT] button. TERMINOLOGY Default screen: The default screen is a voice select screen (page 27) that appears when you turn on the power to the Clavinova. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 23 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual parts. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [RIGHT] and the left-hand part is played by [LEFT]. Basic Operation 1 SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT CONTRAST B A NO DOWN YES UP iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D SONG VOICE 32 procedure 1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice. After you select a song to practice, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] button to turn off the corresponding part. TIP You can turn parts on or off, even during playback. When you first select a song, both [RIGHT] and [LEFT] indicators light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted. Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off. 2. Start playback and playing. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you just turned off. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Sync Start) You can cause playback to begin when you play the keyboard (Sync Start). Hold down the [STOP] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will blink, and the Clavinova will wait for Sync Start. Now when you play the keyboard, playback will begin at the same moment. If you press the [STOP] button while waiting, Sync Start will be cancelled. 24 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual TERMINOLOGY Sync: Synchronous; occurring at the same time Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Stop playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP Resetting the part playback Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever you select a new song. Basic Operation 3. Practicing with the Repeat Playback function and the preset songs The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a song or a specific range of measures in a song. This is useful for repeated practicing of difficult-to-play phrases. Playing back a song repeatedly procedure 1. Enter the Repeat mode. Select a song to practice, then press the [REPEAT] button. 2. TIP You can repeatedly play back all songs from the 50 preset songs or from the USB storage devices (page 73). Start Repeat playback. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. 3. Exit the Repeat mode and return to the normal play mode. Press the [STOP] button to stop playback, then press the [REPEAT] button. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 25 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Specifying a range of measures and playing them back repeatedly (A-B repeat) Procedure Basic Operation 1. Select the desired song for practicing and play it. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. 2. Specify the repeat range. Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from point A to point B is played back repeatedly, TIP Specifying the repeat range between point A and the end of the song. Specifying only point A results in repeat playback between point A and the end of the song. TIP 3. Cancel the specified range and return to the normal play mode. Press the [REPEAT] button. 26 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual When you select another song, the specified range is automatically cancelled and the repeat function is turned off. Selecting and Playing Voices Selecting Voices SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP Voice group buttons GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING Basic Operation 1 2 FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG Procedure 1. Select a voice group. TERMINOLOGY Voice On the Clavinova, a voice means “tone” or “tonal color.” Press a voice group button. 2. Select a voice. TIP Use A [–][+] buttons to select a voice. Voice group GRANDPIANO1 GRANDPIANO2 E.PIANO1 E.PIANO2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR Voice name GrandPiano1 MellowPiano RockPiano HonkyTonkPiano GrandPiano2 BrightPiano E.Piano1 SynthPiano E.Piano2 Vintage E.Piano Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' E.Clavichord Wah Clavi. Vibraphone Marimba Celesta NylonGuitar SteelGuitar Voice group CHURCHORGAN JAZZORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH.PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG Voice name PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganTutti PipeOrganFlute 1 PipeOrganFlute 2 JazzOrgan RotaryOrgan MellowOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat SynthPad 1 SynthPad 2 WoodBass Bass&Cymbal ElectricBass FretlessBass XGVoice • For details on XG voices, refer to “XG voice list” (the separate data list booklet). If you select XG XG voices are categorized and included in separate folders. You can select the XG voice group first, then select the desired voice. 2-1. Simultaneously press the [–][+] screen buttons located beside the XG voice name display, to access a screen where you can select XG voices. 2-2. Use A [–][+] buttons to select the voice group. 2-3. Use C [–][+] buttons to select the desired voice. You can also switch between voices in the same group by pressing a voice group button repeatedly. TIP To learn characteristics of the voices, listen to demo songs for each voice group (page 20). Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 108 for more information on characteristics of each preset voice. TIP You can control the loudness of a voice by how hard you play the keyboard, although different playing styles (touch sensitivities) have little or no effect with the sound of certain musical instruments. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 108. TIP XG is a major enhancement of the GM System level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specially to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 27 Selecting and Playing Voices Using the pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. Basic Operation Damper (right) pedal When you press the damper pedal, the notes you play have a longer sustain. When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. A “half-pedal” effect lets you use the damper pedal to create partial sustain effects, depending on how far down you press the pedal. TIP When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. TIP The threshold at which the Half Pedal effect starts can be set from the Half Pedal Point parameter inthe Function menu (page 89). Sostenuto (center) pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will not sustain. TIP When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft pedal (left) The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you play the target notes.) With the Vibraphone, Jazz Organ and Mellow Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 89.) 28 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual If the damper pedal doesn’t work, or notes are sustained even when the pedal is not pressed, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the [PEDAL] jack on the unit (see step 6 on page 113). Also, make sure that the RPedalFunc parameter in the “FUNCTION” menu is set to ON (see page 87). You can adjust the depth of the resonance produced by the “Sustain Samples” using the Sustain Sampling Depth parameter in the “FUNCTION” menu. (See page 90.) TIP You can assign a function to each pedal via the “RPedalFunc”, “CPedalFunc”, and “LPedalFunc” parameters in the “FUNCTION” menu. (See page 87.) TIP The center and left pedals can also be assigned to song start/ stop operation (PLAY/PAUSE function) via the “PedalPlay/ Pause” parameter in the “FUNCTION” menu (on page 89). Selecting and Playing Voices Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS] Basic Operation The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance, Reverb, and Chorus. [CHORUS] button [REVERB] button SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D SONG BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] button [BRILLIANCE] You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference. Procedure Press one of the BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/ [BRIGHT] buttons to select the desired tonality. A B Brilliance NO YES TIP You can press BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] buttons, and then use D [–][+] buttons to select the desired tonality. Normal TIP C Mellow3 Mellow2 Mellow1 D TERMINOLOGY Soft and mellow tone. The sound becomes more mellow and rounder as the number increases. Normal........... Standard tone Normal setting: The “Normal setting” refers to the default setting (factory setting) obtained when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova. TIP Bright1 Bright2 Normal setting = Normal Bright tone. The sound becomes brighter as the number increases. Bright3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. If you select [Bright1], [Bright2] or [Bright3] as the type of brilliance, the volume level will increase slightly. Under this condition, if you raise the [MASTER VOLUME] dial setting, the sound may become distorted. In this case, lower the volume accordingly. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 29 Selecting and Playing Voices [REVERB] This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall. Procedure Basic Operation Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb on and off. Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is selected. TIP You can select a reverb type via the Reverb Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. (See page 79.) TIP Normal setting = ON [CHORUS] This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound. Procedure Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the chorus on and off. You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS] ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 80). The [CHORUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is automatically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting. TIP You can select a chorus type via the Chorus Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the chorus depth for the selected voice via the Chorus Send parameter. You can also turn chorus on or off via the Chorus On Off parameter. (See page 79.) TIP Normal Setting: The normal chorus on/off setting is different for each voice. 30 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Selecting and Playing Voices Combining two voices (Dual mode) The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from different group. SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD 2 METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF 2 A 1 3 Voice group buttons GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT CONTRAST B NO DOWN Basic Operation You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 110 for examples of effective voice combinations. YES UP iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from the same group. 3 2 14 Voice group buttons Dual mode using voices in different voice groups Procedure 1. Enter Dual mode. TIP Press two voice group buttons simultaneously. Voice 1 Voice 2 A B GrandPiano1 C 2. Vibraphone NO YES If you want to select Dual mode for the left-hand area when the entire keyboard is divided into left and right areas (page 33), hold down [SPLIT] button and simultaneously press two voice group buttons. D TIP Select a voice. Refer to page 27 for details on how to select XG voices. Use the A [–][+] buttons and B [–][+] buttons to select a voice. The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 108 are called voice 1, and those listed in the bottom row are called voice 2. 3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any voice group button. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 31 Selecting and Playing Voices Dual mode using voices in the same voice group Procedure Basic Operation 1. Select a voice group. In normal play mode, press the desired voice group button. 2. Select a voice. Use the A [–][+] buttons to select a voice. 3. Select another voice. TIP Use the B [–][+] buttons to select another voice in the same voice group. To use the identical voices, press the B [–][+] buttons once. To use different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–][+] buttons repeatedly. A B E.Piano1 C 4. NO YES D Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any voice group button. 32 SynthPiano CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual If you want to select Dual mode for the left-hand area when the entire keyboard is divided into left and right areas (page 33), press D [–] [+] buttons. Selecting and Playing Voices Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) 23 2 SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP Basic Operation Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the [WOOD BASS] or [E. BASS] voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 110 for examples of effective voice combinations. Voice group buttons GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG 3 4 1345 Procedure 1. Enter Split mode. Press the [SPLIT] button. 2. Select a voice for the right hand. Use the voice group buttons and the A [–] [+] buttons to select the voice for the right-hand area. 3. Select a voice for the left hand. Hold down the [SPLIT] button, and press a voice group button to select the voice group for the left-hand area. TIP Refer to page 27 for details on how to select XG voice. Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a voice. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 33 Selecting and Playing Voices 4. Specify the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range). The normal setting of the split point is “F 2.” TIP A specified “split point” key is included in the left-hand range. TIP Basic Operation The split point can also be set by the [FUNCTION] parameter [SplitPoint]. (page 87) F#2 Center “C” To change the split point setting: Hold down the [SPLIT] button, then use the D [–] [+] buttons to specify the split point. (Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT] button and play the key you wish to assign as the split point. A B SplitPoint NO YES F#2 C D Release the [SPLIT] button to return to the main screen. 5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode. Press the [SPLIT] button. You can use Dual (see page 31) in each area (right-hand and left-hand) of Split mode. A B GrandPiano1 Vibraphone C 34 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Harpsi.8' WoodBass NO YES D Selecting and Playing Voices Using the metronome The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for practice. SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT Basic Operation 12 iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] buttons Procedure 1. Start the metronome. Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. Adjusting the tempo TIP Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button. A B Tempo NO YES The default tempo is 120. (If a song has been selected, the song tempo is used.) 120 C D To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 5–500), use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] or the D [–][+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal (default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons or the D [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen. 2. TIP You can set the time signature, metronome volume, and metronome tone using the METRONOME [SETTING] button. (See page 76.) Stop the metronome. Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 35 Recording Your Performance Basic Operation This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova recording function. You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova keyboard for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part, then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Since you can record up to sixteen parts separately, you could record the leftand right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed performance or ensemble song one by one to build a song. TIP You can record your performance (audio data) to a cassette tape recorder or other recording devices via the AUX OUT connector. (see page 61.) TERMINOLOGY Recording vs. Saving: The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense. A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 95 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. Recording a New Song There are two ways to record your performance: recording it quickly without specifying a recording part, or recording several different parts to multiple parts. You can select whichever way best suits your purpose. ■ Recording a performance without specifying the recording part (page 37) This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance without specifying the recording parts—useful, for example, in recording solo piano pieces. In this way, the performance is automatically recorded to part 1 (right part). ■ Recording a performance of several different parts (page 41) This lets you record the right, left and extra parts separately. Since you can record the left part while playing back the right, this is useful for recording both parts of a duet. Since you can record up to sixteen parts separately, record the performance of each instrument part one by one and create fully orchestrated compositions. EXTRA PARTS LEFT TIP RIGHT Part 1 [RIGHT] corresponds to part 1. Record the right-hand part to [RIGHT]. Part 2 [LEFT] corresponds to part 2. Record the left-hand part to [LEFT]. Part 3 Part 4 Part 16 36 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual [EXTRA PARTS] corresponds to part 3-16. Record parts 3-16 in addition to part 1 and 2 when you are recording a song which has many parts, such as a symphony orchestra. Appropriate channels (parts) in the song will automatically be assigned to [RIGHT] and [LEFT]. Therefore, [RIGHT] may be assigned to a part other than Part 1, or [LEFT] to a part other than Part 2. Recording Your Performance Recording a performance without specifying the recording part 2 EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION Basic Operation SONG EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG 13 45 Procedure 1. Select “NewSong” for recording. TIP If you select a song other than “----:NewSong” and record on a part that already has data, the existing data on the part will be lost. Press the [REC] and [STOP] buttons simultaneously. “NewSong” screen A B -----------------:NewSong BAR 001 NO C 2. YES D Select a voice. TIP Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 27). Set the other parameters, such as reverb, chorus and Song Balance. Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to set the volume level to suit your preference. You can also use the dial to adjust the level during playback. After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button once to return to the “NewSong” screen. 3. Set the tempo in Step 3. TIP See page 44 for more information on recording in Dual/Split mode. Engage the record mode. Press the [REC] button. The [REC] and [RIGHT] indicators flash in red. (To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button.) Record standby screen A B SongRecording -----:NewSong C BAR 001 NO YES D Set the tempo, if necessary. If this record standby screen does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button once. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 37 Recording Your Performance 4. Start and stop recording. TIP Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. (Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording. The recording screen displays the current measure number. Using the metronome You can record data while using the metronome. To do this, turn the metronome on before step 4. The metronome is not recorded. Basic Operation Record screen A TIP B SongRecording -----:NewSong BAR 012 NO C YES D Measure number in recording To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. As soon as recording is stopped, the song is automatically saved to Storage memory (page 45). When saving is completed, the Storage memory screen appears. A B SAVE Executing -----:NewSong001.MID C 5. NO YES D Play back the recorded performance. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual TIP When you press the [REC] button, recording pauses. To return the location to the start of the song, press the [REC] button, again. TIP Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance. 38 To stop recording in the middle of a song, press the [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. To resume recording, press the [PLAY/ PAUSE] button again or play a note on the keyboard. Rename songs The recorded songs are named automatically, but you can rename songs as you like (page 50). Recording Your Performance Re-recording a song partially This section explains how to record part of a song again. Basic Operation Procedure 1. Select a recording method. 1-1 Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button. 1-2 Press the A [–][+] buttons to display “RecStart” or “RecEnd.” 1-3 Press the D [–][+] buttons to specify how the recording should start and end. Starting methods: Normal: The existing data will be erased after re-recording starts. FirstKeyOn: Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note will not be erased. Ending methods: Replace: The data after the point you stop recording will also be erased. PunchOut: The data after the point you stop recording will remain. 2. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Use the B [–][+] buttons while the playback screen is displayed to move through the measures or play back the recording and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. If the playback screen is not displayed, press the [SONG SELECT] button once. A B MEMORY BAR 009 M-001:NewSong001.MID C 3. NO YES D Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 37 if you wish to change the previous settings. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 39 Recording Your Performance 4. Engage record mode. Press the [REC] button. Basic Operation To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button. After pressing the [REC] button again or the [STOP] button when “RecStart” is set to “Normal” (page 39), “Overwrite?” is shown in the display. To cancel this and not overwrite, press the B [– (NO)] button. 5. Start and stop recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. (Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording. To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. 6. Save the recorded songs. When you stop recording, the display prompts you whether you want to overwrite the song or not. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the song. To cancel overwriting, press the B [– (NO)] button. 40 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance Recording a performance of several different parts 23 2 EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING Basic Operation SONG 1 FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG 124 Procedure 1. 2. Select “New Song” and a voice for recording. Follow the same operation steps as in “Recording a performance without specifying the recording part” above. Refer to steps 1-2 on page 37. TIP Set the tempo in Step 2. TIP See page 44 for more information on recording in Dual/Split mode. Specify the recording parts and engage the record mode. Record to the right (part 1) or left (part 2) part: Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [RIGHT]/[LEFT] button. Record to the extra parts (part 3-16): Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button and press the A [–][+] button to display “RecExtraPartsCh.” Press the D [–][+] buttons to specify a recording part. The specified part is assigned to the [EXTRA PARTS] button. After specifying the recorded part to the [EXTRA PARTS] button, press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [EXTRA PARTS] button. The [REC] and specified part indicators flash in red. (To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button.) Record standby screen A B SongRecording -----:NewSong C BAR 001 NO YES D Set the tempo, if necessary. If this record standby screen does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button once. If you don’t want to hear the right/left part while you record, press the [RIGHT]/[LEFT] button so that its indicator is turned off. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 41 Recording Your Performance 3. Start and stop recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. Basic Operation (Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording. To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. As soon as recording is stopped, the song is automatically saved to Storage memory (page 45). When saving is completed, the Storage memory screen appears. Other recording techniques Adding data to or recording over an existing song The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “-----: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs [P-001—P-050], commercially-available music data <see page 59>, or your old recorded performances <see page 45>). Procedure 1. Select a song to be recorded over. To select a preset song, press the [SONG SELECT] button, then press the A [–][+] buttons to display “PRESET.” To select a song, press the C [–][+] buttons. To select a song from commercially available music data or from already-recorded data, press the A [–][+] buttons to display “MEMORY” or “USB1” in the Song Select screen and press the C [–][+] buttons. To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a performance without specifying the recording part” from pages 37 to 36. When you record over a preset song, the song is automatically saved to Storage memory (page 45) when the recording stopped. When you record over a song of commercially available music data or of already-recorded data, the display prompts you whether you want to overwrite the song or not (when recording is stopped). Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the song. 42 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual TIP If you record on a part that already has data, the existing data on the part will be lost. Recording Your Performance Changing a voice or tempo after recording You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo. You can also change these elements in the middle of a song. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a song you wish to change (page 42). To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the song, specify the measure to change by using the B [–][+] buttons while the playback screen is displayed or by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.). For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E. Piano2, use the voice group buttons and the A [–][+] buttons to select E.Piano2. When the setting is complete, press the [SONG SELECT] button once to return to the song select screen. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the part to change. The indicator for the selected part lights up in red. Change the tempo setting now, if necessary. Basic Operation Procedure TIP Before changing a voice or tempo, set the starting method to “Normal.” (page 39) When the starting method is set to “FirstKeyOn,” you cannot change a voice or tempo. TIP Refer to “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 101 for information on the settings that can be changed here. TIP Change the tempo in Step 4. CAUTION The panel settings on Step 3 will be saved in memory and you will not be able to restore the previous settings. Proceed with caution. At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data. 5. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode. When you exit record mode, the display prompts you whether you want to overwrite the song or not. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the song. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 43 Recording Your Performance Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] While recording multiple parts one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the playback of the recorded parts and your current performance. Basic Operation Procedure 1. Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider to the left or right to make adjustments. SONG KEYBOARD SONG BALANCE The song playback volume will be lower. TIP Some commercially-available music data contains extremely high volumes. When using such data, please adjust the song balance. Your playing volume will be lower. Recording in Dual or Split mode When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate part. The following table shows how parts are assigned to each voice. CAUTION When you record multiple parts one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see page 42), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution. In the following example, RIGHT, LEFT, and EXTRA PARTS n have been selected for recording. Parts assigned for recording MAIN (voice 1) Parts used for recording Dual LEFT (voice 2) LEFT EXTRA PART n RIGHT LEFT EXTRA PART n RIGHT LEFT EXTRA PART n ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ Part 1 Part 2 Part n – Part 3 Part 4 Part 1 Part n Part 1 Part n Part 2 Part n+1 Part 2 Part n+1 – Part 3 Part n+2 – Part 4 Part n+3 Part n+2 – Note: Part n = Part 3 – Part 16 If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, Parts 1, 2, and 3 are used. TIP Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded. 44 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Split+Dual RIGHT LEFT (voice 1) MAIN (voice 2) Split Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] The following parameters are provided for these operations: Parameter name Settings Reference page Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device Save 48 Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a USB storage device Delete 49 Renaming files Rename 50 Copying files Copy 51 Moving files Move 53 Making folders (directories) in the USB storage device MakeDir 54 Formatting a USB storage device Format 54 Automatically selecting a song in storage media SongAutoOpen 55 Changing the type of characters on screen CharacterCode 55 TERMINOLOGY File A file contains a group of data. On the Clavinova, a song file includes song data and a song number. Basic Operation File screens (accessed via the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button) enables you to handle files (e.g., save, delete and rename recorded songs), copy and format medias and change characters on the screen. Memory Memory is a location inside the Clavinova in which you can save and edit data. Character code Type of characters TIP Please note that the copy features are intended for your personal use only. Clavinova memory The Clavinova has the following three types of memory: • Current memory: This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit the currently-selected song before playback or recording. • Preset song memory: This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs. • Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save recorded songs or song data loaded from USB storage device. When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song memory, Storage memory, or USB storage device, into Current memory. You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Storage memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are lost. However, recorded songs are automatically saved to Storage memory from Current memory. In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is referred to as a “Current song,” a song in Storage memory is a “Memory song,” and a song on a USB storage device is an “External song.” Preset song memory Storage memory Current memory USB storage device Clavinova CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 45 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Song types This instrument handles various types of songs. Letters and song numbers are displayed to the left of the song name. The letters indicate the different song types as follows: Basic Operation P ..................Preset songs M .................Memory songs MP...............Protected songs such as preset songs saved to Storage memory, or Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft songs in the Storage memory. MS, Ms ........Yamaha-protection-formatted songs in the Storage memory. U1................External song U1P .............External songs such as Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) songs or Disklavier Piano Soft songs in a USB storage device. U1S, U1s .....Yamaha-protection-formatted songs in a USB storage device. Limitation of file operations TIP Ø: Yes ˛: No Song types Save Delete P M, U1 MP, U1P MS, Ms, U1S, U1s Ø*1 Ø Ø*1 ˛ Ø Ø*2 Ø Ø ˛ Rename ˛ Ø Ø*2 Copy Ø*1 Ø Ø*1 ˛ Move ˛ Ø ˛ Ø*3 *1 Only to Storage memory *2 Only MP songs *3 Only between Storage memory and USB storage memory 46 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual U1 song with the “.SME” extension can only be deleted — cannot execute other file operations at left. Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Basic file operation A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 95 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take. SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD 3 METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF 4 A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB SETTING CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT Basic Operation 1 FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG 23 4 4 5 Procedure 1. Prepare for handling file(s). TIP Prepare for handling files as follows. → → To use “Save,” “Rename,” “Copy” or “Move”: Select a song via the [SONG SELECT] button. To use “MakeDir”: Select the USB storage device via the [SONG SELECT] button. To use “Delete,” “Format,” “SongAutoOpen” or “CharacterCode”: No need to perform any operations in this step. 2. CAUTION Access the File/Song Setting menu. Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button. A B Save Selected?--> M-002:NewSong002.MID /C NO YES D To close the File/Song Setting menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice. 3. Select the desired parameter. 4. Set the parameter or execute the command. 5. If a folder is displayed for an External song, the[ / ] indicator is displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to return to the previous (upper) level. Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] or A [–][+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired item. Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)], C [–][+], D [–][+] buttons. For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corresponding section below. Close the File/Song Setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button. Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. TERMINOLOGY “Overwrite?→”: Do you wish to overwrite the song? “Execute?→”: Do you wish to execute the operation? “Sure?→”: Are you sure? “Executing”: The Clavinova is executing the operation. “Completed”: The operation is complete. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 47 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save] Recorded songs are automatically saved to Storage memory from Current memory, so normally you won’t need to save songs using this function. However, if a “MemoryFull” message or “SystemLimit” message appear, save the song to another device using this function. Basic Operation A B Save Selected?--> M-001:NewSong001.MID /C NO YES D CAUTION Do not turn off the power before the save operation is completed. If you turn off the power to the Clavinova before the save operation is completed, the recorded song will be lost. Procedure See page 47 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. TIP → → If a folder is displayed for an External song, the[ / ] indicator is displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to return to the previous (upper) level. 4-1 4-2 4-3 Select a save destination. Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and press the C [–][+] buttons to select a save destination (Storage memory or USB storage device). After selecting a save destination, press the B [+ (YES)] button to fix it. Then press the B [+ (YES)] button to display “Execute?→.” Name the song. To move the cursor (small underline), use the C [–][+] buttons. To insert a space, press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously. To select a character at the cursor, use the D [–][+] buttons. To delete a character, press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously. You can use up to 46 one-byte or 23 two-byte characters for a song name. If the name is longer than the screen, use the C [–][+] buttons to move the cursor and scroll the name. You can change the type of characters on the screen using the “CharacterCode” parameter. Execute the operation. Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. The song is automatically numbered. TIP If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavinova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them. 48 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual TIP CAUTION Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a USB storage device ... [Delete] Basic Operation This deletes a song from Storage memory or from a USB storage device. It is not possible to delete a preset song or current song. B A Delete Execute?--> U1-001:NewSong001 /C NO YES D Procedure 4-1 Press the C [–][+] buttons to select a song to delete. 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. After you delete a song, the Clavinova automatically updates the song numbers. TIP When you delete a folder, all files within that folder will be deleted. TIP If a folder is displayed for an External song, the[ / ] indicator is displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to return to the previous (upper) level. → To select Storage memory or USB storage device: Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and press the C [–][+] buttons to select Storage memory or USB storage device. Then, press the B [+ (YES)] button or D [+] button to display the content of the Storage memory or USB storage device and select a song by pressing the C [–][+] buttons. TIP → See page 47 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 49 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Renaming files ... [Rename] You can change a song’s title except for the preset songs and [-----: NewSong]. Procedure Basic Operation CAUTION See page 47 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. A B Rename Execute?--> M-001:NewSong001 C 4. Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. NO TIP YES D Name the song as described in the “Save” section (page 48). → → To rename folders To rename a folder, select “Rename” then select the folder by pressing the [SONG SELECT] button and the C [–] [+] buttons. (The folder name is shown after “DIR:.”) To select another level in this display, press the D [–][+] buttons. (Other levels can be selected when “ / ” is shown in the display.) After that, select “Rename” again and rename the folder. TIP After you rename a song, the Clavinova sorts songs alphabetically and renumbers them. 50 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Copying files ... [Copy] A B Copy Execute?--> U1-001:NewaSong001 /- NO C YES D Copy operation TIP Please note that the copy features are intended for your personal use only. Basic Operation You can copy songs. However, you cannot copy files to the same root directory or same folder. TERMINOLOGY Root: The highest level of a hierarchical structure. This indicates an area which does not belong to a folder. You can copy files to other memory location. File A File B Can be copied. File A Can be copied. File B USB storage device Storage memory You can copy files to a folder but not on the same root directory. File A Can be copied. File A Folder Cannot be copied. File B USB storage device CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 51 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Procedure TIP See page 47 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. Protected songs cannot be copied. TIP Basic Operation 4-1 When you copy a song to/from a USB storage device, make sure that a USB storage device is connected to the instrument. Please note that the copy features are intended for your personal use only. TIP You cannot copy a folder. 4-3 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. 52 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual TIP If a folder is displayed for an External song, the [ / ] indicator is displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to return to the previous (upper) level. → Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and press the C [–][+] buttons to select a copy destination (Storage memory or USB storage device). After selecting a copy destination, press the B [+ (YES)] button to fix it. → 4-2 CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Moving files ... [Move] You can move (cut and paste) songs. B Move Execute?--> U1-001:NewSong001 /C NO Basic Operation A YES D Procedure 4-1 When you move a song to/from a USB storage device, make sure that a USB storage device is connected to the instrument. Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and press the C [–][+] buttons to select a move destination (Storage memory or USB storage device). After selecting a move destination, press the B [+ (YES)] button to fix it. 4-3 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. TIP You cannot move a folder. TIP If a folder is displayed for an External song, the [ / ] indicator is displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to return to the previous (upper) level. → 4-2 TIP Preset songs and some protected songs cannot be moved. → See page 47 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for step 4. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 53 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Making folders in the USB storage device ... [MakeDir] You can create folders (directories) on the USB storage device to organize songs. This instrument enables you to create folders only in the USB storage device—not in the Preset song memory and Storage memory. Basic Operation CAUTION B A MakeDir Execute?--> U1 :NewDir_ NO YES Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. D C TIP To make a folder for the selected drive or level Procedure See page 47 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for step 4. 4-1 Follow the steps “Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device” on page 48 to name the folder. 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. The folder is created in the root directory in the USB1 (indicated by “U1” in this display) device. To make a folder for the selected drive or level, select “MakeDir” then select “USB” by pressing the [SONG SELECT] button. In this display, press the A [–][+] button to select another drive. Press the D [–][+] button to select another level. After that, select “MakeDir” again and make a folder, following step 4 at left. TERMINOLOGY Root: The highest level of a hierarchical structure. This indicates an area which does not belong to a folder. Formatting a USB storage device ... [Format] You can format media so that it can be used with the Clavinova. A B Format USB1 Execute?--> C NO YES D Procedure See page 47 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for step 4. 4-1 4-2 If some USB storage devices are recognized by the instrument, press the C [–][+] buttons to select a device. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. 54 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. TIP For a list of devices whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha, visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/CLP295GP/ Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Automatically selecting a song in storage media ... [SongAutoOpen] A B SongAutoOpen NO YES On C D Procedure TIP When a USB storage device is connected to the instrument, a song in the device will not automatically open. A song is automatically opened only when media is inserted to a drive. Therefore, this function cannot be used for devices which do not use removable media — such as USB flash memory or hard disk drive. Basic Operation Specify whether a song (not contain in a folder) which does not contain to a folder will automatically be opened when you insert the media. See page 47 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for step 4. 4 Use D [–][+] button to select ON or OFF. Changing the type of characters on screen ... [CharacterCode] You can change the type of characters that appear on screen. The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.” A B CharacterCode NO YES Japanese C D Options: International, Japanese Character list International Japanese CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 55 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data TIP You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 36) as well as commercially-available music data. You can also play the keyboard along with the playback. See page 59 for information on the types of song data that can be played on the Clavinova. TIP TIP Basic Operation Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200–300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. Change the Clavinova’s character type ([CharacterCode]) as appropriate for the selected song (page 55). Playing back a song If you want to play back an External song on this instrument, connect the USB storage device and insert the appropriate media into the device. 1 SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD 2 METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF CONTRAST B A NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO D C VOICE SONG 43 5 2 Procedure TIP Display the song select screen. Press the [SONG SELECT] button. Song select screen A B PRESET Bar 001 P-001:Invention 1 C YES D TIP Select the desired song. If a folder is displayed for an External song, the [ / ] indicator is displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to return to the previous (upper) level. → 2. NO TIP You can repeat playback a single song via the [Repeat] button (page 25) or repeat playback all songs by using the “SongRepeat” function (page 73). → 1. You can enjoy ensemble performance by yourself. Record the parts for a four-handed song or a piano duet, then play the recorded part while playing the other part on the keyboard. TIP If the song name extends beyond what can be displayed in the screen, you can press the D [+] button to move toward the right in steps of one character. Press the D [–] button to move back to the left in steps of one character. 56 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data 2-1 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the song type: “PRESET,” “MEMORY,” or “USB1.” 2-2 Basic Operation PRESET ......Stands for Preset song memory. This memory contains 50 piano preset songs. MEMORY...Stands for Storage memory. This memory contains recorded songs or copied songs. “MEMORY” is not displayed when this memory does not contain any songs. USB1...........Stands for USB storage device. This device contains commercially available song data, etc. “USB1” is not displayed when the USB storage device is not connected to the instrument. When several USB storage devices are recognized to the instrument, numbers are added after “USB,” like “USB1,” “USB2”... The numbers are not fixed and may change according to the order in which the devices are connected and disconnected. Use the C [–][+] or [SONG SELECT] button to select a song. Letters (page 46) and song numbers are displayed on the left of the song names. 3. Start playback. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Sync Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Sync Start” function. To enter Sync Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Sync Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is in Sync Start standby mode. You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by using the B [–][+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is playing or stopped. The bar number in playback A B USB1 Bar 005 U1-001:Song001.MID C NO YES D You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback parts and your current performance using the [SONG BALANCE] slider. (See page 44.) TERMINOLOGY Bar: measure TIP You can play the metronome along with the song playback. When you stop playback, the metronome is also stopped. TIP Press the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. Press the C [–] button during playback to start playback from the previous song. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 57 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen. Basic Operation 4. Stop playback. 5. Return to the main screen. When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Playback pauses when you press the button. Press the [EXIT] button. 58 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data Turning part playback on and off TIP You can practice a part or phrase using the “SongRepeat (page 73)” and “PhraseMark (page 73)” parameters in the “FILE/SONG SETTING” menu. Basic Operation While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these part buttons turn off the indicators, and the data on those parts will not be played. Pressing the part buttons toggles part playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned off. TIP Appropriate channels (parts) in the song will automatically be assigned to [RIGHT] and [LEFT]. Therefore, [RIGHT] may be assigned to a part other than Part 1, or [LEFT] to a part other than Part 2. Supported song data type Data formats that can be played on the CLP-295GP The Clavinova CLP-295GP plays song data in the following formats: Sequence format SMF (Standard MIDI File) formats 0 and 1 ESEQ TERMINOLOGY Sequence format: A structured method for recording performance data. Performance data recorded on the CLP-295GP is saved as SMF format 0. Voice arrangement format XG voice arrangement GM system level 1 voice arrangement GM system level 2 voice arrangement DOC voice arrangement Performance data recorded with preset XG voices on the CLP-295GP can be played on other XG-compatible instruments. See the separate “Data List” for the XG voice list. Floppy disk format 3.5-inch 2DD disks in the MS-DOS 720KB format 3.5-inch 2HD disks in the MS-DOS 1.44MB format TERMINOLOGY Voice arrangement format: A structured method for numbering the voices for assignment. TIP This instrument can play GS format songs. However, the voices may not be completely the same as used in the original. TERMINOLOGY Disk format: A structured method for writing data to disk. Refer to “Data compatibility” on page 106 for more information on formats. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 59 Connections Connectors Basic Operation CAUTION Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. at front on the left of the panel R L R AUX OUT SELECT L/L+R AUX IN USB USB TO DEVICE TO DEVICE B TO HOST IN OUT MIDI THRU AUX PEDAL 1 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal (A/B) This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices. Refer to “Connecting to a USB storage device” on page 62. 2 USB [TO HOST] terminal This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 65 for more information. 3 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] terminals Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors. MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data. MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data. MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] terminal as it is. About MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer. 4 [AUX PEDAL] jack A separately sold FC7 foot controller or FC4/FC5 foot switch can be connected to this jack. By using an FC7 you can control the volume while playing to add expression to your performance, or control various other functions. By using an FC4/FC5, you can switch various selected functions on/off. To select the function that will be controlled, use the [FUNCTION] parameter [AuxPedal] (page 88). The [PLAY/PAUSE] function can also be assigned to a foot switch (page 89). 60 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual TIP There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: USB [TO DEVICE] and USB [TO HOST]. Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors. Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. TIP MIDI performance data and commands are transferred in the form of numeric values. TIP Since MIDI data that can be transmitted or received varies depending on the type of MIDI device, check the “MIDI Implementation Chart” to find out what MIDI data and commands your devices can transmit or receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI Implementation Chart appears on the separate Data List. CAUTION Connect or disconnect the pedal when the power is off. Connections CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks, but the [REVERB], [CHORUS], and BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] (page 29) settings do not. Basic Operation 5 AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. TIP If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack. TIP R L L+R Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance. AUX IN AUX IN phone plug (standard) audio cable Plug shape depends on the device. AUX OUT Tone Generator 6 AUX OUT [L] [R] Pin jacks These jacks let you connect the Clavinova to your stereo system etc. to play at higher volumes, or connect a cassette recorder etc. to record your playing. Use audio cables to make connections as shown in the diagram. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova R TIP When the sound from the AUX OUT jacks is routed to the AUX IN jacks, the input sound will be output from the speaker of the CLP. The output sound may be excessively loud and may cause noise. Stereo L AUX OUT AUX OUT AUX IN RCA pin plug RCA pin plug audio cable When “AuxOutLevel (page 91)” is set to “Fixed,” the sound is output to the external device at a fixed level and the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting will not affect the sound. When “AuxOutLevel (page 91)” is set to “Variable,” the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting will affect the sound that is output from AUX OUT. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 61 Connections Connecting to a USB storage device By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. Basic Operation Compatible USB storage devices Up to two USB storage devices, such as a floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, flash memory reader/writer, etc., can be connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub.) Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice, or visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/CLP-295GP/ CAUTION Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. TIP CD-ROM drive Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. TIP Do not use a non-ID SmartMedia card. TIP Number of USB storage devices Two USB storage devices can be connected to one USB [TO DEVICE] terminal using a hub device. This instrument can recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device. TIP About USB hub If you are connecting two devices at the same time, use a USB hub device. The USB hub must be self-powered (with its own power source) and the power must be on. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub. TIP Optional Floppy Disk Drive Yamaha UD-FD01 62 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Connections Connection to a USB storage device USB [TO DEVICE] terminal A TIP If you connect USB storage devices to both USB [TO DEVICE] terminals, the devices may not operate properly. Basic Operation This instrument has two USB [TO DEVICE] terminals; one on the left of the panel and one on the terminal at the front. Select the desired terminal SELECT USB TO DEVICE USB [TO DEVICE] terminal B Both are the same terminal; however, both cannot be used at the same time. Use the [SELECT] switch to select the desired terminal. Switching to “A” selects the terminal on the left of the panel, while switching to “B” selects the terminal panel at the front. CAUTION While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations), do NOT use the [SELECT] switch. Doing so may corrupt the media or data. Formatting USB storage media When you execute a file-related operation with a connected USB storage device, a message may appear indicating the device/media is unformatted. If so, execute the Format operation (page 54). CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Proceed with caution. To protect your data (write-protect): To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. To display the data in the USB storage device To view the data of the USB storage device on the CLP display, press the [SONG SELECT] button to engage song selection mode or press the [FILE/ SONG SETTING] button to engage file/song setting mode. If you try to engage these modes before connecting the USB storage device, press the [EXIT] button to exit the mode and re-engage the mode. TIP Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 63 Connections Backing up your data to a computer ■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then archive and organize the files as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown below. Basic Operation Saves internal data to a USB storage device. Instrument USB [TO DEVICE] terminal USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it to the computer. Backing up data to a computer and organizing files/folders. Computer USB storage device ■ Copying files from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by first copying them to the storage media, then connecting/inserting the media to the instrument. Not only files created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI files created on other devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer. Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the data on the instrument. Copying the files of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device. Computer USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the instrument. Reading files on the USB storage device from the instrument. USB [TO DEVICE] terminal USB storage device 64 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Instrument Connections Connecting a personal computer There are the two methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer: 1. Connecting the USB port on the computer to the Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST] terminal (see below) 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI terminals (page 66) If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, we recommend that you connect the computer and the instrument by USB, rather than by MIDI. Basic Operation By connecting a computer to the USB [TO HOST] or MIDI terminals, you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI, and take advantage of sophisticated computer music software. Keep in mind that you also need to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver. TERMINOLOGY Driver: A driver is software that provides a data-transfer interface between the computer’s operating system and a connected hardware device. You need to install a USB MIDI driver to connect the computer and the instrument. For more information, refer to the following pages. CAUTION When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power of the Clavinova and quit any application software that is open on the computer before connecting any cables. After making connections, turn on the power to the Clavinova. CAUTION If you are not using the connection between the Clavinova and your computer, you must disconnect the cable from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. The Clavinova may not operate correctly if a cable is left connected. Connecting the USB port on the computer to the Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST] terminal Use a USB cable to connect the USB port on your computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal on the Clavinova. Instrument USB TO DEVICE TIP • The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. • When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. TO HOST USB [TO HOST] terminal • For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant software. USB cable Computer CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 65 Connections CAUTION Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST] terminal Basic Operation When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off and restart the computer. • Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby), and quit any open application software, also turns off the power to the instrument. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument off or unplugging the USB cable to/from the instrument/computer. - Quit any open application software on the computer. - Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI terminals Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables. USB port or serial port (modem or printer terminal) Instrument MIDI cable MIDI [IN] terminal MIDI [OUT] terminal MIDI interface 66 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Computer Detailed Settings CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 67 Detailed Settings You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch, selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. For the basic procedure to make these settings, refer to page 93. Parameter List Recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] Detailed Settings Settings Parameter name Reference page Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device Save 48 Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a USB storage device Delete 49 Renaming files Rename 50 Copying files Copy 51 Moving files Move 53 Making folders in the USB storage device MakeDir 54 Formatting a USB storage device Format 54 Automatically selecting a song in storage media SongAutoOpen 55 Changing the type of characters on screen CharacterCode 55 Playing back a song/all songs repeatedly SongRepeat 73 Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number PhraseMark 73 Correcting note timing Quantize 74 Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing QuickPlay 74 Auditioning the channels ChannelListen 75 Deleting data from each channel ChannelClear 75 Selecting a record starting method RecStart 39 Selecting a record ending method RecEnd 39 Recording parts 3-16 (Extra Parts) RecExtraPartsCh 41 Metronome [METRONOME SETTING] Settings 68 Parameter name Reference page Setting the metronome time signature TimeSignature 76 Setting the metronome volume level MetronomeVolume 76 Setting the metronome voice MetronomeSound 76 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Detailed Settings Voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode, parameters with the “ *” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Parameter name Reference page Setting the octave* Octave 78 Setting the volume level* Volume 78 Setting the position of right and left channels* Pan 78 Make fine adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode) Detune 78 Selecting the reverb type ReverbType 79 Setting the reverb depth* ReverbSend 79 Selecting the chorus type ChorusType 79 Setting the chorus depth* ChorusSend 79 Setting the chorus on/off ChorusOnOff 80 Selecting the DSP type* DSP Type (DSP) 80 Setting the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect* VibeRotorSpeed 80 Turning the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off* VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff) 80 Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speaker* RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed) 81 Adjusting the depth of the DSP effect* DSPDepth 81 Adjusting the brightness of the sound* Brightness 81 Adjusting the resonance effect* HarmonicContent (Harmonic) 81 Adjusting the low-range frequency of the equalizer* EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq) 81 Adjusting the low-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer* EQ LowGain 82 Adjusting the high-range frequency of the equalizer* EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq) 82 Adjusting the high-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer* EQ HighGain 82 Setting the touch sensitivity* TouchSense 82 Detailed Settings Settings iAFC [iAFC SETTING] Settings Parameter name Reference page Turning iAFC on/off iAFC 83 Adjusting the Dynamic Damper Effect depth DynDmpFX Depth 83 Adjusting the Spatial Effect depth SpatialFX Depth 84 Calibration (automatic adjustment) Calibration 84 Restoring the default calibration setting iAFC Default 84 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 69 Detailed Settings Other settings [FUNCTION] Detailed Settings 70 Settings Parameter name Changing the key Transpose 85 Selecting a touch response TouchResponse 85 Fine tuning the pitch Tune 86 Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice PianoTuningCurve 86 Selecting a scale Scale 86 Specifying the Split Point SplitPoint 87 Setting the right pedal function RPedalFunc 87 Setting the center pedal function CPedalFunc 87 Setting the left pedal function LPedalFunc 87 Setting the auxiliary pedal function AuxPedalFunc 88 Turning the right pedal function on/off RPedalOnOff 88 Turning the center pedal function on/off CPedalOnOff 88 Turning the left pedal function on/off LPedalOnOff 88 Turning the auxiliary pedal function on/off AuxPedalOnOff 89 Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to the pedal PedalPlay/Pause 89 Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal AuxPedalType 89 Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound HalfPedalPoint 89 Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal SoftPedalDepth 89 Setting the depth of string resonance StringResonanceDepth 90 Setting the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal SustainSamplingDepth 90 Specifying the volume of the key-off sound KeyOffSamplingDepth 90 Setting the range of pitch bend PitchBendRange 90 Switching the speaker on/off Speaker 90 Selecting the AUX OUT level (Fixed/Variable) AuxOutLevel 91 Setting the MIDI transmit channel MidiOutChannel 91 Setting the MIDI receive channel MidiInChannel 91 Turning local control on/off LocalControl 92 Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission MidiOutSelect 92 Selecting a type of data received via MIDI ReceiveParameter 92 Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI TransmitParameter 92 Transmitting the initial settings on the panel InitialSetup 93 Selecting items saved at shutdown MemoryBackup 93 Restoring the normal (default) settings FactorySet 93 Backing up the Clavinova’s internal data FullBackup 94 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Reference page Detailed Settings Making detailed settings 1 2 SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF 3 4 A CONTRAST B NO DOWN 1 YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT 1 iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG 1 2 3 3 5 1 1. Detailed Settings Procedure Access a setting menu. Press the desired setting button ([FILE/SONG SETTING], METRONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [iAFC SETTING], or [FUNCTION]) to access the corresponding setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu. 2. Select the desired parameter or part. 3. Set the parameter or part. Press the setting button, A [–][+], and/or C [–][+] buttons repeatedly as required. Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)], C [–][+], and D [–][+] buttons to select or set the option. To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 71 Detailed Settings 4. Write, execute, or save the data. There are two ways to respond to the messages. If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears: Detailed Settings Press the B [+(YES)] button to display confirmation (“Sure?→”). To proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B [+(YES)] button. When “Overwrite?→” appears after the “Completed” message, press the B [+(YES)] button. A B Quantize Execute?--> Strength=100% 1/4 NO C YES D If “Set?→” appears: Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. A B Main Octave C 5. 72 Close the setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Set?--> 0 NO YES D Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] For information on the settings “Save” – “CharacterCode,” see “Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]” on page 45. You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PRESET”), memory songs (“MEMORY”), or External songs (“USB1”) (see page 56). Procedure Select the desired song and press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button to access the “File/Song Setting” menu. EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING Detailed Settings SONG FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG [FILE/SONG SETTING] button Playing back a song/all songs repeatedly [SongRepeat] Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [PhraseMark] You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song selected from the 50 preset songs or from the USB storage devices. • When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the song you selected using the front panel, then starts repeat playback of the specified songs until you press the [STOP] button. See the procedure on page 71. If you select a song from an ensemble collection disk, such as the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can specify phrase numbers in the score to play back from the score from the mark point, or to play back the phrase repeatedly. • If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On” selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified phrase until you press the [STOP] button. • If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts without repeat. See the procedure on page 71. Select on or off. A B SongRepeat C Off USBSongs NO YES D Select repeat on or off. Specify the repeated songs. A Setting range: [USBSongs] [MemorySongs] [USB+Memory] [PresetSongs] [ALL] [OneSong] All songs in the media inserted in the USB storage device All songs in the Clavinova’s memory All songs from “USBSongs” and “MemorySongs” All 50 preset songs All songs from “USBSongs,” “MemorySongs,” and “PresetSongs” One song selected from the front panel TIP B PhraseMark 001 C RepeatOff NO YES D Specify the phrase number. Setting range of the phrase number: --- (not specified) 0 - the last phrase number of the song If you select any song other than those from the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can select only “Off.” When several USB storage devices are connected, the device which contains the previously selected song is the destination device. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 73 Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] Correcting note timing [Quantize] You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth notes. • Changes are made by song. See the procedure on page 71. Stores the changed value. A B Quantize Execute?--> Strength= 50% 1/8 C NO Quarter-note length YES D Detailed Settings Specifies the type of note. Notes for which you can adjust the timing: 1/4................. quarter note 1/6................. quarter note triplet 1/8................. eighth note 1/12............... eighth note triplet 1/16............... sixteenth note 1/24............... sixteenth note triplet 1/32............... thirty-second note 1/8+1/12........... eighth note + eighth note triplet* 1/16+1/12......... sixteenth note + eighth note triplet* 1/16+1/24......... sixteenth note + sixteenth triplet* The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same part, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all notes in the part are quantized to straight eighth notes—completely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. 74 From this display, you can determine how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% produces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the specified percentage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Original data Quantizing strength=100 Quantizing strength=50 Setting range: 0% – 100% Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] This parameter enables you to specify whether a song that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a silence prior to the first note, should be played from the first note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank). See the procedure on page 71. A B QuickPlay NO YES On C D Setting range: [On] Playing from the first note [Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest or blank) Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear] You can select a single channel to listen to its contents. Playback starts from the first note. See the procedure on page 71. Playback continues as long as you press and hold down this button. A You can delete data from each of 16 channels. See the procedure on page 71. Delete data. A ChannelClear Execute?--> Ch1 B ChannelListen Start?--> Ch1 C NO B YES C Setting range: Ch1 - Ch16 TIP The song data consists of 16 channels. A channel is assigned to a part, so in this instrument, channel means the same as part. TIP Even channels that contain no data are displayed. YES D Select the desired channel for deletion. D Select the desired channel for playback. NO Detailed Settings Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] Setting range: Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels) TIP The song data consists of 16 channels. A channel is assigned to a part, so in this instrument, channel means the same as part. TIP Even channels that contain no data are displayed. TIP When you clear all channels using the “ALL” parameter, you can overwrite the song. In this case, the file which contains song settings with no channel data is saved. For information on the settings “RecStart” and “RecEnd,” see “Re-recording a song partially” on page 39. For information on the setting “RecExtraPartsCh,” see “Recording a performance of several different parts” on page 41. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 75 Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome. Procedure Press the METRONOME [SETTING] button to access the Metronome Setting menu. METRONOME [SETTING] button SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG Detailed Settings Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature] See the procedure on page 71. See the procedure on page 71. B A TimeSignature 4/ 4 NO A B MetronomeSound YES NO D C Set the denominator of the time signature. For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–][+] buttons to select “3” and the D [–][+] buttons to select “4.” Setting range for the numerator: 1 - 16 Setting options for the denominator: 2, 4, and 8 D Setting range: [BellOff] [EnglishVoice] [GermanVoice] [JapaneseVoice] [FrenchVoice] [SpanishVoice] [BellOn] Click (standard metronome sound) Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish Click and bell TIP To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.” Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume] See the procedure on page 71. A B MetronomeVolume NO YES 100 C Setting range: 0 - 127 76 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual YES BellOff C Set the numerator of the time signature. Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play on the keyboard while changing the settings. Procedure 1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the “Voice Setting” menu. SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP [VOICE SETTING] button GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING Detailed Settings 1 2 FUNCTION EXIT MIN 2. NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D SONG VOICE Press the A [–][+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the voice. The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice. [Main] [Main × Layer] [Left] [Left × Layer] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode) MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual mode) LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode) LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode) CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 77 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] TIP In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. TIP Parameter names enclosed in parentheses ( ) are displayed in Dual mode. The pitch of a note can be shifted upward or downward in steps of an octave. See the procedure on page 71. Detailed Settings NO Main Pan Set?--> C NO YES D C In Dual mode: B MainxLayer Pan(GrndPno1) YES Set?--> C NO In Dual mode: YES D C D C Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) A B MainxLayer Set?--> Octave(GrndPno1) 0 NO C YES Setting range: L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right) D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: –2 (two octaves lower) - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two octaves higher) Setting the volume level [Volume]* A Make fine adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] The pitch of the two sounds selected in Dual mode can be “skewed” slightly away from each other. See the procedure on page 71. A You can set the volume level for each voice part. See the procedure on page 71. B MainxLayer Detune C Set?--> + 3 NO YES D B Main Volume Set?--> 100 NO C YES D In Dual mode: A B MainxLayer Set?--> Volume(GrndPno1) 100 C NO YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: 0 - 127 78 B A B A Set?--> 0 You can specify the position in the stereo image from which you hear the sound. See the procedure on page 71. A Setting the octave [Octave]* Main Octave Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Setting range: –20 - +20 (Positive (+) settings will raise the pitch of the first sound and lower the pitch of the second sound. Negative (–) settings will do the opposite.) Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the reverb type [ReverbType] Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type] TIP TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “LeftXLayer.” You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.” See the procedure on page 71. See the procedure on page 71. B Main ReverbType Set?--> Hall1 NO C A Main ChorusType YES D B Set?--> Chorus NO C Setting range: Room Simulates reverberation in a room. Hall1 Simulates reverberation in a concert hall. Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of “Hall1.” Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument sound. Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal plate. YES D Detailed Settings A Setting range: Chorus Adds a rich, spacious sound. Celeste Adds swell and a spacious sound. Flanger Adds swell effects of an ascending or descending jet plane. Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]* See the procedure on page 71. Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]* A B Main ChorusSend TIP The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter is set to “0.” Set?--> 48 NO C YES D In Dual mode: See the procedure on page 71. A MainxLayer Set?--> ChorusSend(E.Piano1) 72 B Main ReverbSend B A Set?--> 14 NO YES YES D C C NO D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) In Dual mode: A Setting range: 0 - 127 B MainxLayer Set?--> ReverbSend(E.Piano1) 26 C NO YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: 0 - 127 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 79 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] SoundBoard Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff] Off You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/ off setting for the voice automatically changes according to this parameter. Setting the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect* [VibeRotorSpeed] TERMINOLOGY TIP Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is disabled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0. See the procedure on page 71. Detailed Settings B A Main ChorusOnOff Simulates the reverberation of a piano soundboard. No effect. Set?--> Off NO YES D C Rotor= The rotating portion of an electrical device etc. This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained above. This sets the speed of the vibrato effect that is applied when you have selected Vibraphone and are using the VibeRotor pedal. See the procedure on page 71. B A Setting range: On/Off Main VibeRotorSpeed Set?--> 6 NO D C Selecting the DSP type* [DSP Type (DSP)] Setting range: 1 - 10 You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus). See the procedure on page 71. A B Main DSP Type C Set?--> DelayLCR NO CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Turning the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off* [VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff)] YES D Setting range: DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and right positions. DelayLR Delay applied at left and right positions. Echo Echo-like delay CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed. Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect. Rotary Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker. Tremolo The volume level changes in rapid cycles. VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibraphone. AutoPan The sound pans left to right and back and forth. Phaser The phase changes periodically, swelling the sound. AutoWah The center frequency of the wah filter changes periodically. 80 YES This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained above. It turns on/off the vibrato effect that is applied when you use the VibeRotor pedal. See the procedure on page 71. A B Main VibeRotorOnOff C Setting range: On/Off Set?--> On NO YES D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speaker* [RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed)] Adjusting the resonance effect* [HarmonicContent (Harmonic)] See the procedure on page 71. This will be displayed only if Rotary is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained above. It sets the rotation speed of the rotary speaker effect. See the procedure on page 71. B Main Set?--> HarmonicContent 0 NO C YES D B Main RotarySpeed Set?--> Slow NO C YES Setting range: –64 - +63 TIP D Detailed Settings A A Resonance can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone, making the sound brighter and harder. Setting range: Slow/Fast Adjusting the low-range frequency of the equalizer* [EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq)] Adjusting the depth of the DSP effect* [DSPDepth] This sets the depth of the DSP effect (page 80). Some DSP Type settings do not allow you to set the DSPDepth. See the procedure on page 71. A TERMINOLOGY Equalizer: An audio equalizer divides the frequency spectrum into multiple regions and enables the user to adjust the relative amplitude of each region. B Main DSPDepth Set?--> 127 NO C YES D High Gain Low Gain Setting range: 1 (output only the original sound with almost no effect applied) - 127 (output only the sound processed by the effect) Adjusting the brightness of the sound* [Brightness] Low Freq. High Freq. See the procedure on page 71. See the procedure on page 71. A A B B Main Brightness Set?--> 0 NO Main EQ LowFreq. YES C C Setting range: –64 - +63 Set?--> 32 NO YES D D Setting range: 32 Hz - 2.0 kHz CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 81 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Adjusting the low-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer* [EQ LowGain] See the procedure on page 71. B A Main EQ LowGain Set?--> 0 NO YES D C Detailed Settings Setting range: –12 - +12 dB Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]* This parameter enables determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play). Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe organs do not change regardless of how you play the keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127. (See the setting range below.) See the procedure on page 71. B A Main TouchSense Adjusting the high-range frequency of the equalizer* [EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq)] B Set?--> 500 NO In Dual mode: A C Adjusting the high-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer* [EQ HighGain] See the procedure on page 71. A B Setting range: –12 - +12 dB 82 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual YES D Setting range: 0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127 (loudest and fixed) Setting range: 500 Hz - 16.0 kHz Set?--> 0 NO YES D C B Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) C Main EQ HighGain YES D MainxLayer Set?--> TouchSense(GrndPno1) 64 A NO C See the procedure on page 71. Main EQ HighFreq. Set?--> 64 NO YES D Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING] When iAFC is engaged, the Clavinova will sound deeper and more resonant, similar to an acoustic musical instruments. This lets you experience the ambience and reverberation that are characteristic of performing on stage or simulates the sustain sound that occur when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano. This section describes how to make various settings for the iAFC function. You can also perform an automatic adjustment in order to obtain the optimal iAFC effect. Procedure Press [iAFC SETTING] button to enter iAFC Setting mode. [iAFC SETTING] button SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C Detailed Settings EXIT MIN D VOICE SONG Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the first time, and after each time you move the Clavinova (page 84). When the [iAFC SETTING] button is pressed before performing the automatic adjustment, the “Calibration” screen will be displayed. TIP iAFC cannot be used in the following cases. • When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay. • When the Speaker setting is Normal, and headphones are connected. • When the Speaker setting is off. TIP When using iAFC, do not block the speaker located on the rear panel of the Clavinova. The optimal iAFC effect cannot be obtained if this speaker is blocked. TIP iAFC uses Yamaha’s EMR (Electronic Microphone Rotator) technology to ensure stability against acoustic feedback. Turning iAFC on/off [iAFC] Adjusting the Dynamic Damper Effect depth [DynDmpFX Depth] See the procedure on page 71. A B iAFC NO YES On C Setting range: On/Off D Dynamic Damper Effect is one type of the iAFC effect. Dynamic Damper Effect simulates the sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano. The internal microphones are not used, but the sound produced within the Clavinova is processed to create a spacious sensation, as you press the damper pedal and play the keyboard. See the procedure on page 71. A B DynDmpFX Depth NO YES 98 C D Setting range: 0 - 127 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 83 Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING] Adjusting the Spatial Effect depth [SpatialFX Depth] Restoring the default calibration setting [iAFC Default] Detailed Settings Spatial Effect is one type of the iAFC effect. Spatial Effect creates a sense of reverberation and spaciousness by picking up the output sound using internal microphones and output the sound from the speaker on the rear of the instrument. The spread and spaciousness of the sound is different depending on the depth. For lower depth settings, this creates the resonance and enhances the acoustic realism of the sound that is characteristic of acoustic instruments by creating a virtual soundboard. For deeper depth settings, the sound of the instrument itself and the sound of singing and other instruments played nearby is picked up by internal microphones, and processed to simulate the spatial characteristics of performing together on stage. See the procedure on page 71. B A SpatialFX Depth NO YES 10 D C Setting range: 0 - 127 Calibration (automatic adjustment) [Calibration] This automatically adjusts the sensitivity and response of iAFC so that the optimal iAFC effect will be obtained. When automatic adjust begins, a test sound (noise) will sound for about five seconds. While automatic adjustment is being performed, do not make audible noises in the vicinity of the Clavinova. See the procedure on page 71. A B Calibration Sure?--> Test sound is output. C NO YES D TIP The keyboard will not produce sound while automatic adjustment is being performed. Nor is it possible to adjust the volume of the Clavinova. 84 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual This sets the calibration function to the default setting. See the procedure on page 71. A B iAFC Default C Set?--> NO YES D Other settings [FUNCTION] You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc. Procedure Press the [FUNCTION] button to enter Function mode. SONG EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE FILE/SONG SETTING REPEAT KEYBOARD METRONOME SETTING ON/OFF A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR VOICE SETTING CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG SPLIT iAFC REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT SETTING FUNCTION EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNC START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG Changing the key [Transpose] Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] TIP TRANSPOSE= To change the key (Changing the key: To raise or lower the overall pitch of the entire song.) The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to the key of F. A B Transpose Master C Detailed Settings [FUNCTION] button NO YES 0 D Setting for: Master The sound of the entire instrument (the manually-played sound and the song playback) Keyboard The manually-played sound Song The song playback Setting range: –12 (–1 octave) - 0 (normal pitch) - +12 (+1 octave) You can specify a touch response (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). See the procedure on page 71. A B TouchResponse Vel= 64 Fixed NO C YES D Setting range: Light With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a loud sound. The volume level of tones tends to be consistent. Medium Standard touch response. Heavy You must hit the key very hard to generate a loud volume. This allows for versatile expression, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones. Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be the same regardless of how hard you play the keys. Use the B [–][+] buttons to set the volume level. Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level: 1 - 127 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 85 Other settings [FUNCTION] Fine tuning the pitch [Tune] Selecting a scale [Scale] You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. See the procedure on page 71. A B Tune NO You can select various scales. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience the tunings of these genres. See the procedure on page 71. YES A3=440.0Hz D Scale Detailed Settings Setting range: A3 = 414.8 Hz - 466.8 Hz (0.2 Hz steps) You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and “GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of other instruments voices. See the procedure on page 71. B A NO YES Stretch C BaseNote=C PureMajor NO D Setting range: Stretch Tuning curve particularly for pianos Flat Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range Setting range: Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Currently most popular piano tuning scale. PureMajor/PureMinor Based on natural overtones, three major chords using these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. Pythagorean This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher, is based on the interval of a perfect 5th. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MeanTone This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th century through the late 18th century. Handel used this scale. Werckmeister/Kirnberger These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often used now to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords. Normal setting: Equal If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to specify the root note using the B [–][+] buttons. B A Scale BaseNote=C PureMajor Setting range: C, C , D, E , E, F, F , G, A , A, B , B CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual NO YES D C 86 YES D C Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] PianoTuningCurve B A C Other settings [FUNCTION] Specifying the Split Point [Split Point] You can specify the split point (the boundary between the right-hand and left-hand keyboard areas). See the procedure on page 71. Setting the center pedal function [CPedalFunc] See the procedure on page 71. B A B A SplitPoint NO CPedalFunc Set?--> Sostenuto NO YES YES F#2 D C D Setting range: Same as “Setting the right pedal function” above, except for the following parameters. • SustainCont • Expression • PitchBend Up • PitchBend Down Setting range: A-1 - C7 TIP You can also use [SPLIT] to set the split point. (page 34) Normal Setting: Sostenuto Setting the right pedal function [RPedalFunc] See the procedure on page 71. Setting the left pedal function [LPedalFunc] B A RPedalFunc C Set?--> SustainCont Detailed Settings C NO YES See the procedure on page 71. D A Setting range: Sustain ON/OFF switch type damper SustainCont Damper that sustains the sound proportionately to how deeply you press the pedal Sostenuto Sostenuto (page 28) Soft Soft (page 28) Expression A function that lets you create changes in dynamics (volume) as you play PitchBend Up A function that smoothly raises the pitch PitchBend Down A function that smoothly lowers the pitch RotarySpeed Change the rotational speed of the JazzOrgan rotary speaker (switch between fast/slow each time you press the pedal) VibeRotor Switch the vibraphone vibrato on/off (switch on/off each time you press the pedal) B LPedalFunc C Set?--> Soft NO YES D Setting range: Same as “Setting the right pedal function” above, except for the following parameters. • SustainCont • Expression • PitchBend Up • PitchBend Down Normal Setting: Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan, MellowOrgan and VibraPhone), Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan and MellowOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor) Normal setting: SustainCont CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 87 Other settings [FUNCTION] Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedalFunc] You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack. See the procedure on page 71. B A AuxPedalFunc Set?--> Expression NO YES D C Turning the center pedal function on/off [CPedalOnOff] This turns the center pedal function on or off for the relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and determine whether the center pedal function (set on page 87) will affect that part or not. See the procedure on page 71. B A Detailed Settings Setting range: Same as “Right pedal function assignment” (page 87). Normal setting: Expression CPedalOnOff Main Set?--> On NO D C TIP YAMAHA FC7 foot controller This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression, SustainCont, or PitchBend Up/Down. YAMAHA FC4 foot switch YAMAHA FC5 foot switch These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain, Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, or VibeRotor. Turning the right pedal function on/ off [RPedalOnOff] This turns the right pedal function on or off for the relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and determine whether the right pedal function (set on page 87) will affect that part or not. See the procedure on page 71. A Select on or off. Select the voice part for which the center pedal on/off setting is to be changed. Setting for: Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer) Setting range: On/Off Normal Setting: Different for each voice. Turning the left pedal function on/off [LPedalOnOff] This turns the left pedal function on or off for the relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and determine whether the left pedal function (set on page 87) will affect that part or not. See the procedure on page 71. B A RPedalOnOff Main C Set?--> On NO YES B LPedalOnOff Main Set?--> On NO YES D C Select the voice part for which the right pedal on/off setting is to be changed. 88 YES Select on or off. Select the voice part for which the left pedal on/off setting is to be changed. D Select on or off. Setting for: Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer) Setting for: Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer) Setting range: On/Off Setting range: On/Off Normal Setting: Different for each voice. Normal Setting: Different for each voice. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Other settings [FUNCTION] Turning the auxiliary pedal function on/off [AuxPedalOnOff] This turns the auxiliary pedal function on or off for the relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and determine whether the auxiliary pedal function (set on page 88) will affect that part or not. See the procedure on page 71. Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType] A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] jack may switch on and off differently. For example, some pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off when you press them. Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism. See the procedure on page 71. Set?--> On AuxPedalType NO YES Make NO YES Detailed Settings AuxPedalOnOff Main B A B A D C D C Select on or off. Select the voice part for which the AUX pedal on/off setting is to be changed. Setting for: Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer) Setting range: On/Off Setting range: Make, Break Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] Here you can specify the point to which you must depress the pedal (right and AUX) before the assigned effect begins to be applied.This setting applies only to the “SustainCont” effect (page 87) that is assigned to the right or AUX pedal. Normal Setting: Different for each voice. Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to the pedal [PedalPlay/Pause] B A HalfPedalPoint NO YES 0 TIP If you assign the SONG PLAY/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in the Function menu (pages 87 and 88) is disabled. See the procedure on page 71. A D C Setting range: –2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effective with the deepest press) B PedalPlay/Pause Center C Select a pedal to assign the function Setting for: Left, Center, AUX Setting range: On/Off Normal setting: Off for all pedals NO YES Off D Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal [SoftPedalDepth] Select on or off. See the procedure on page 71. B A SoftPedalDepth NO YES 5 C D Setting range: 1 - 10 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 89 Other settings [FUNCTION] Setting the depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] This parameter is effective on the voices, such as “Grand Piano 1.” See the procedure on page 71. A B StringResonanceDepth NO YES 5 C D Detailed Settings Setting range: Off, 1 - 10 Setting the range of pitch bend [PitchBendRange] This specifies the amount of change that can be produced by the pitch bend function which smoothly varies the pitch. • This setting applies only to the manually-played sound. • This setting can be made in semitone steps. • You can set the pedal function (page 87) to specify whether the pitch will be raised or lowered. See the procedure on page 71. B A PitchBendRange Setting the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth] This parameter is effective only on the voice group “GRANDPIANO1.” See the procedure on page 71. A NO D C Setting range: 0 - +12 (Pressing the pedal will raise/lower the pitch by 12 semitones [1 octave]) Normal setting: –2 B SustainSamplingDepth NO YES 5 C Switching the speaker on/off [Speaker] D Setting range: Off, 1 - 10 This setting lets you switch the speaker on/off. See the procedure on page 71. B A Specifying the volume of the key-off sound [KeyOffSamplingDepth] Speaker Normal(HeadphoneSW) C You can adjust the volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that occurs when you release a key) This is effective on the voice groups “Grand Piano1,” “Harpsichord,” and “E.Clavichord” and on the voice “E.Piano2.” See the procedure on page 71. B A KeyOffSamplingDepth NO YES 5 C Setting range: Off, 1 - 10 90 YES 2 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual D NO YES D Normal (HeadphoneSW) The speaker will sound only if headphones are not connected. On The speaker will always sound. Off The speaker will not sound. Other settings [FUNCTION] Setting the MIDI receive channel [MidiInChannel] Select the volume level of the signal output from the AUX OUT jacks. When “Fixed” is selected, the level cannot be controlled by using the [MASTER VOLUME] control. When “Variable” is selected, the level can be controlled by using the [MASTER VOLUME] control. See the procedure on page 71. AuxOutLevel NO YES Fixed MidiInChannel Midi/Usb1Ch1 NO YES Song D C Select a MIDI receive part Setting for: Midi/Usb1 Ch1 - Ch16 Usb2 Ch1 - 16 D C B A Select a channel B A You can specify whether each channel of data from MIDI [IN] and USB [TO HOST] will be received. See the procedure on page 71. Detailed Settings Selecting the AUX OUT level [AuxOutLevel] Setting range: Fixed/Variable Setting range: Normal Setting: Fixed Normal setting: Song, Main, Left, Layer, LeftLayer, Keyboard, Off Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data. See the procedure on page 71. A Midi/Usb1 Ch1- Ch16 Usb2 Ch1 Usb2 Ch2 Usb2 Ch3 Usb2 Ch4 Usb2 Ch5 Others MIDI IN — — — — — — — Song Keyboard Main Left Layer LeftLayer Off USB TO HOST B MidiOutChannel Main Midi/Usb1Ch1 C NO YES D Select a voice part. Specify the channel. Midi/Usb1 Ch1 - Ch16 Usb2 Ch1 - Ch16 Song Keyboard – LeftLayer Setting for: Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer Setting range: Midi/Usb1 Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.) Normal setting: Main Left Layer Left Layer — Midi/Usb1 Ch1 — Midi/Usb1 Ch2 — Midi/Usb1 Ch3 — Midi/Usb1 Ch4 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 91 Other settings [FUNCTION] Turning Local control on/off [LocalControl] Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter] Detailed Settings “Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova produces the sound from its tone generator when you play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off ” state, the keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each other. This means that even if you play the keyboard, the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device, which can produce the sound. The “Local Control Off ” setting is useful when you wish to play an external sound source while playing the keys on the Clavinova. See the procedure on page 71. A B LocalControl NO YES On C This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can receive. See the procedure on page 71. A B ReceiveParameter Note YES C D Select a type of data. Select on or off. Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: On/Off Normal setting: On for all types of data D Setting range: Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] On/Off Normal setting: This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can transmit. See the procedure on page 71. On Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect] A B TransmitParameter Note C You can select whether your performance data or song playback data is sent via MIDI. See the procedure on page 71. A B MidiOutSelect NO YES Keyboard C D Setting range: Keyboard performance data played on the keyboard Song song playback data Normal setting: Keyboard 92 NO On CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Select a type of data. NO YES On D Select on or off. Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: On/Off Normal setting: On for all types of data Other settings [FUNCTION] Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] Setting range: On/Off A B InitialSetup Start?--> NO C YES D Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackup] You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost after you turn off the power to the Clavinova. • Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory), the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting), and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting (page 55) are always backed up. See the procedure on page 71. B A MemoryBackup Transpose C Select the desired item. NO Normal setting: The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, and Function (except for Transpose and SplitPoint setting) parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set to On. Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory default) settings. • The CharacterCode parameter setting (page 55) does not change. • The MemoryBackup parameter setting (On/Off) (left column) is reset to the normal setting. • You can specify whether the memory songs are erased or kept. See the procedure on page 71. CAUTION Do not turn off the power during factory set. Doing so could result in damage to the data. Reset the Clavinova. A YES B FactorySet Execute?--> MemorySongExcluded C Off Detailed Settings You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selection, to a connected sequencer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer, it is useful if you first send and record (at the beginning of the performance data) the panel setup data for your performance during playback. See the procedure on page 71. NO YES D Select whether the memory songs are erased or kept. D Select on or off. Setting for: Transpose Brilliance ReverbOnOff iAfc SplitPoint Main/LeftVoice MetronomeSetting File/SongSetting MidiSetting (“MidiOutChannel” – “TransmitParameter” in the Function settings) Function (except for Transpose, SplitPoint and Midi settings). Selecting for “MemorySong”: MemorySongExcluded Memory songs are kept. MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are erased. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 93 Other settings [FUNCTION] Other method for restoring the normal settings Press and hold down the white key on the right end (C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs saved in the storage memory are not erased. ND O2 ZZ AN E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT Backing up the Clavinova's internal data [FullBackup] For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you copy or save your important data to a USB storage device. This provides a convenient backup if the internal memory is damaged. Perform the operation after connecting the USB storage device. See the procedure on page 71. Perform backup. EFFECT POWER B A Detailed Settings FullBackup Save Execute?--> YES D C C7 NO Select “Save” or “Load.” [POWER] switch TIP It's best not to connect several USB storage devices when backing up your data. When several devices are connected, a specific device cannot be identified for saving data. CAUTION Do not execute “FullBackup” during file operations such as loading songs. Doing so could result in damage to the data. TIP It may take 1 – 2 minutes to complete the backup. CAUTION Do not turn off the power during full backup. Doing so could result in damage to the data. TIP Protected songs (indicated by MS/Ms in the display) cannot be saved. Move the songs to the USB storage device before executing Full Backup. If you do not move the protected songs and keep the data only in the internal memory, the data will be deleted when you load the backup settings to the instrument. 94 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Message List The messages are listed in alphabetical order. AccessError AccessError AllFiles?--> BackupMemoryFull Meaning • This message appears when data has failed to be written or loaded to the Storage memory or USB storage device. When you write or load data via USB storage device, check the USB cable connection and try again. If you still see this message, the Storage memory/ media/device may have malfunctioned or may be damaged. • This message appears when a Read-Only file is selected to be overwritten. The file cannot to be overwritten. When you delete a folder, this message asks you whether you want to delete all of the files in that folder. To delete all files in the folder, press the D [+ (YES)] button. To cancel, press the D [– (NO)] button. This message will appear when there is insufficient empty space in backup memory. Turn the power switch off and turn it on again to delete unnecessary backup data. CalibrationError DefaultReset This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possible and the settings reset to their default values. In this case, perform the automatic adjustment once again. Calibration Lid is closed. Open Lid. This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possible because the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay. In this case, open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. Calibration Speaker sound is off This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possible because no sound is output from the rear speaker. In this case if the “Speaker” setting is Off, turn “Speaker” On. If “Speaker” is set to Normal and headphones are connected, unplug the headphones. Calibration Sure?--> Test sound is output. This message will appear to confirm start of the iAFC calibration. When calibrating, a test tone will sound from the instrument. Canceled This message confirms that the operation has been cancelled. Caution ProtectedSong Detailed Settings Message This message appears when you do the following operation to a protected song: • Overwrite (protected songs cannot be overwritten) • Save with a new name (protected songs cannot be used with “Save as” function) • Delete (this message confirms that the protected song will be deleted) • Rename (renamed protected songs may not be played back) CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 95 Message List Message Completed This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavinova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step. This message appears when a communication error occurred between the instrument and drive. Check the USB cable connection and try again. If you still see this message, use a drive whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 62). DriveError Detailed Settings DriveNumLimitOver DriveRemoved DuplicateName Execute?--> FactorySet Restart The number of drives exceeds the limitation. Two USB storage devices can be connected to one USB [TO DEVICE] terminal using a hub device. This instrument can recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device. The connection has been cut off because of an abnormal power surge to the drive. To recover from this, turn the power switch of the hub off and on again, or disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and turn the power switch of the instrument off and on again. DrivePowerError This message appears when the USB storage device is removed from the instrument. When you attempted to rename a song and save it in “Rename” (page 50), this message will appear if an identically-named song already exists. Three seconds after this message is displayed, you will return to the previous screen. Please specify a different name. This message prompts you to execute a file-related operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel. Executing The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. Completed This message appears when factory set is completed. The instrument is then restarted. FactorySet Executing MemorySongExcluded 96 Meaning The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 93) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 94). FactorySet Executing MemorySongIncluded The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 93) have been restored. FullBackup Restart This message will appear when loading of the backup file is completed. The instrument is then restarted. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Completed Message List Message Meaning LastPowerOffIllegal MemoryChecking MakeDir ---:Select USB Drive MemoryFull NoDrive NoFile NoSongToCopy NoSongToMove Detailed Settings There is a problem with the USB [TO HOST] terminal • When using the CLP-295GP connected to your personal computer: The driver or MIDI application on your computer is not functioning correctly, perhaps because the computer is turned off, the cable is not connected correctly. In this case, turn off the power of the CLP-295GP and your computer, and check the cable connections. Then turn on the power in the order of your computer → CLP295GP, and check that the driver and MIDI application on your computer are functioning correctly. • When using the CLP-295GP by itself: This message may appear if a cable is left connected to the USB [TO HOST] terminal of the CLP-295GP. In this case, turn off the power of the CLP-295GP, disconnect the cable, and then turn on the power again. If the cable is left connected, the CLP-295GP may not function correctly. HostError This message will appear when the power is turned on after turning off the power while saving a song or internal settings. The internal memory is being checked while this message appears. If the internal settings are damaged, they will be reset to the initial settings. If Memory songs are damaged, they will be deleted. This message appears when you attempt to create a folder to a USB storage device that cannot be accessed. Check that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument and that the [SELECT] switch specifies the appropriate device, then try again. There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs. Save songs to an external device (page 48) or delete some songs in the storage memory, then save new data to memory. A USB storage device was not connected to the instrument when you attempted to perform a drive-related function. Connect the device and continue. • This message will appear when there is no file to load from the media, even if the file name is displayed. Securely insert the media. • This message will appear when two-byte letters are included in the file name. You tried to copy a song that does not exist in the Storage memory or on USB storage device. Select a Memory song or External song via the [SONG SELECT] button. You tried to move a song that does not exist in the Storage memory or on USB storage device. Select a Memory song or External song via the [SONG SELECT] button. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 97 Message List Message Meaning You tried to rename a song that does not exist in the Storage memory or on USB storage device. Select a Memory song or External song via the [SONG SELECT] button. NoSongToRename Overwrite?--> Detailed Settings PC<->CLP InCommunication This message appears when Musicsoft Downloader is started on a computer connected to the instrument. When this message appears, you cannot operate the instrument. PleaseWait You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after you select the song. Wait until the message disappears. ProtectedDrive ProtectedDriveError ProtectedFile ProtectedFileFormatError ProtectedSong This message appears when you try to write (save), copy, or delete data on a protected drive/media. Set protect to off and try again. If you still see this message, the disk is internally protected (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write or copy to such a disk. This message appears when a protected song and the drive are not compatible. Use a drive whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 62). You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected files (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write to, copy, or delete such files. This message appears when you play back a protected song which has a file format error. After you load an internally-protected song into the Clavinova’s Current memory or storage memory, you tried to save the song to a USB storage device. You cannot save such a song to another disk. You cannot write or copy to such a disk. ProtectedSong:UseMove This message appears when you copy a protected song. Protected songs cannot be copied. However, you can move the song (page 53). SecuritySongIsProtected CannotSave This message appears when you attempt to save a protected song (security song). Protected songs cannot be saved. Set?--> 98 This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the existing data with new data. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited settings. Press the B [+(YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel. Message List SongChanged Clear? SongChanged Save? SongError Meaning This message appears when you record or edit the protected song and select another song. The recorded/edited protected song cannot be saved. The song will be deleted when you select another song. You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to storage memory or an external device. If you continue the operation, the recorded song will be lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the “Save” parameter screen. Save the recorded song and proceed to another operation. Detailed Settings Message This message will appear if a problem is found with the song data when you select a song or while the song is playing. In this case, reselect the song, and try once again to play it back. If the message still appears, the song data may have been damaged. 1. This message will be displayed if current memory fills up during recording. Recording will stop automatically at this point. The data that had been recorded up to that point will remain. This message will also be displayed when you attempt to enter Record mode for additional recording if that song already occupies all of current memory. In this case, additional recording will not be possible. If there is an already-recorded part that you do not need to keep, you can use “ChannelClear” (page 75) to delete the unneeded part, so that you will then be able to record the equivalent amount of additional material. 2. This message will be displayed when you select a song if that song is larger than the capacity of the current memory (page 102). This song cannot be loaded into the CLP-295GP, and cannot be played back. Please select a different song. SongTooBig Start?--> This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+ (YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation. Sure?--> This message prompts you to confirm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. SystemLimit UnformattedDrive This message appears when the number of files and folders exceeds the system limit. The maximum number of files/folders which can be stored in a folder is 250. Try again after deleting/moving the unnecessary file(s). You tried to perform a file- or drive-related operation using an unformatted media. Eject the media, format it using the “Format” parameter (page 54), then try again. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 99 Message List Message UnformattedDrive Format? UnsupportedDrive WrongDrive Detailed Settings WrongName WrongSelection 100 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Meaning You tried to perform a file- or drive-related operation using an unformatted media. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button. To format the disk and try again, press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the format parameter (page 54). This message appears when you connect an unsupported drive. Use a drive whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 62). • The connected drive does not support use of protected songs. Use only drives whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 62). • This message appears when the connected USB storage device is damaged and cannot be accessed. You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported by the CLP-295GP, and the CLP-295GP could not process the name. The Clavinova displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song correctly. This message appears when, in copying a song, the same folder has been selected for both the source and destination. You cannot select the same folder for both the source and destination. Select the different folder as the destination folder. Questions about Operations and Functions While you are using a function, some buttons not used for the function are disabled. If the song is playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then, perform the desired operation. ■ The sound sustains indefinitely and does not decay when I press the sostenuto pedal. With the voices in the CHURCH ORGAN, JAZZ ORGAN, STRINGS, CHOIR group, or some voices in the XG group, the sound continues sustaining while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal. ■ Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly when the transpose or octave setting is made. The setting range for the transposition and octave setting is C-2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A-1 - C7.) If the lowest key is set to a note lower than C-2, it will produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a sound one octave lower. ■ How can I return to the recording or song select screen during song recording or playback? Press the [SONG SELECT] button once. ■ The tempo does not change even though I recorded with tempo changes. Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case, the recording will be played back at the original tempo. Make tempo changes when the recording part is selected and a red part indicator is flashing. The same trick applies to editing the tempo after recording. ■ Performance in Dual or Split mode is not recorded. ■ Part data is lost unexpectedly. For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording part for the second voice (that is, the voice for the lefthand part) is automatically assigned (page 31). Therefore, if the part already has data, the data will be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played with the second voice (or the notes lower than the Split point) are not recorded. ■ What type of data is recorded? Data recorded in the parts: • Note data (notes you play) • Voice selection • Clavinova pedals and external pedal on/off • Reverb depth [ReverbSend] • Chorus depth [ChorusSend] • DSP effect depth [DSPDepth] • Sound brightness [Brightness] • Resonance effect setting [HarmonicContent] • Equalizer’s low-range frequency setting [EQLowFreq.] • Equalizer’s low-range gain setting [EQLowGain] • Equalizer’s high-range frequency setting [EQHighFreq.] • Equalizer’s high-range gain setting [EQHighGain] • Octave setting of the voice [Octave] • Volume setting of each voice [Volume] • Left/right position of each sound [Pan] • Fine pitch adjustment between two voices (Dual only) [Detune] • Volume change in response to playing strength for each voice [TouchSense] Data recorded globally in all parts: • Tempo • Time signature • Reverb type • Chorus type • DSP effect type You can change all data except for note data, Octave setting or Time Signature after recording. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 101 Detailed Settings ■ The buttons do not respond. Questions about Operations and Functions ■ How much data can I record? • Current memory (page 48): About 300KB • Storage memory (page 48): About 1,750KB ■ The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the AUX PEDAL jack is reversed. Some types of pedals may turn on and off in opposite fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter (page 88) in the “FUNCTION” menu to change the external pedal setting. ■ The song title is not correct. Detailed Settings The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than that used when you named the song. Also, if the song was recorded on another instrument, the title might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “CharacterCode” parameter (page 55) in the FILE/SONG SETTING menu to change the setting. However, if the song was recorded on another instrument, changing the “CharacterCode” parameter setting may not resolve the problem. ■ What is the difference between “TouchSense” and “TouchResponse” MIDI data? “TouchSense” determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard. The MIDI note-on velocity data is not changed. It changes the volume level at the same velocity data. “TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity of an instrument. The MIDI note-on velocity data is changed when you play the keyboard with a consistent touch. ■ Only “PhraseMark” can be selected via the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button during song playback. The “PhraseMark” parameter can only be set via the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button during song playback. If you desired to select other parameters, stop the song and try once again. 102 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Appendix CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 103 Troubleshooting Problem Solution The power of the Clavinova does not turn on. The power cable is not plugged in (check at the Clavinova and at the electrical outlet). Insert the power cable plug firmly into the Clavinova and into the electrical outlet of the correct voltage. (page 16) There is a clicking noise when you press the [POWER] button to turn the power on or off. This is caused by the electrical power within the instrument. This is not a malfunction. Noise is heard from the Clavinova. A portable telephone is being used near the Clavinova (or the ring tone is sounding). Turn off the power of the portable telephone located near the Clavinova. Noise may be heard if a portable telephone is used near the Clavinova or if the ring tone occurs. The overall volume is too low. Or, there is no sound at all. The [MASTER VOLUME] dial is low- Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. ered. (page 17) The volume level for the keyboard performance is set too low. Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider toward the keyboard to increase the keyboard volume. Headphones are connected (only if the Speaker setting is “Normal HeadphoneSW”). (page 90) Disconnect the headphone plug. Speaker setting is off. Set [Speaker] to “Normal” or “ON”. (page 90) Local Control is turned off. Set Local control ON. (page 92) “Expression” is assigned to the right pedal or the AUX pedal. Assign any function other than “Expression” to the pedal. The keyboard volume is lower than the song playback volume. The volume level for the keyboard performance is set too low. Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider toward the keyboard to increase the keyboard volume. Sound is still heard from the speakers even though headphones are plugged in. Speaker setting is On. Set the speaker setting to “Normal (HeadphoneSW)”. (page 90) iAFC cannot be turned ON. The lid is closed or open with the shorter stay. Open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. Feedback occurs when you turn iAFC on. iAFC was not automatically adjusted correctly. Turn iAFC OFF, and perform the automatic adjustment (page 84) Damper pedal does not function, or notes are sustained even though the damper pedal is not pressed. The plug of the pedal cable is not inserted into the [PEDAL] jack. Plug the pedal cable firmly into the [PEDAL] jack. (Refer to “CLP295GP: Keyboard Stand Assembly” beginning on page 111.) Appendix 104 Cause CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Problem Cause Solution The USB storage device is not recognized by the instrument. The USB storage device may not be recognized by the instrument depending on the timing of the device connection or the setting of the [SELECT] switch. Disconnect the USB storage device and connect it again and select a device using the [SELECT] switch. To view the data of the USB storage device on the CLP display, press the [SONG SELECT] button to engage song selection mode or press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button to engage file/song setting mode. If you try to engage these modes before connecting the USB storage device, press the [EXIT] button to exit the mode and re-engage the mode. If the device is still not recognized, it may not be supported by Yamaha. Only use devices supported by Yamaha (page 62). The USB storage device has hung up (stopped). The USB storage device is not compatible with the instrument. Only use devices whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 62). The USB storage device does not operate properly. Disconnect the device and connect it to the instrument again. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Appendix Troubleshooting 105 Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CLP-295GP, and whether or not the CLP-295GP can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Appendix Basic Check Points Voice Allocation Format The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the items below. • Sequence format • Voice allocation format • Disk Format (floppy disk drive is optional) With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. Sequence Format The CLP-295GP is compatible with the following formats. The system which records song data is called “sequence format.” Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. ■ GM System Level 1 The CLP-295GP is compatible with the following formats. ■ SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. • Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The CLP-295GP is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. • Performance data recorded on the CLP-295GP is saved in the SMF format 0. ■ ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. 106 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially available software. ■ GM System Level 2 “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification hat enhances the original “GM System Level 1” and improves song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater voice selection, expanded voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. ■ XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Song data recorded on the CLP-295GP using voices in the XG category is XG-compatible. Data Compatibility ■ DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is also common format used with various Yamaha software. ■ GS GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more voices and drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects. Appendix Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. Disk format It is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used. This operation is called “formatting.” • There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems. • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 107 Preset Voice List : Yes ×: No Voice group Voice name Stereo sampling Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance GrandPiano1 This sound was sampled from a full concert grand piano. Three stages of dynamics were sampled, and no effort has been spared in making the sound virtually identical to that of an acoustic piano. Even the tonal changes produced by the damper pedal and the subtle sounds of releasing a key are reproduced. The sympathetic vibration (string resonance) that occurs between the strings of an acoustic piano has also been simulated. Suitable not only for classical compositions but also for piano pieces of any style. MellowPiano A warm and mellow piano sound. Ideal for classical music. RockPiano A bright-sounding piano. Ideal for rock styles. GRAND PIANO1 HonkyTonk Piano GRAND PIANO2 × A honky-tonk style piano. Enjoy a tonal character that is quite different than a grand piano. Appendix GrandPiano2 × × × A spacious and clear piano sound with a bright resonance. Ideal for popular music. BrightPiano × × × A spacious and bright piano sound. Ideal for popular and rock music. × × An electronic piano sound produced by an FM synthesizer. The tone will change as you vary your playing touch. Ideal for popular music. × × This voice simulates the electric piano sound produced by synthesizers in popular music. It also goes well with the acoustic piano sound. × The sound of an electric piano using hammerstruck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. × A different type of electric piano sound. Widely used in rock and popular music. E.Piano1 × SynthPiano × E.Piano2 × Vintage E.Piano × E.PIANO1 × E.PIANO2 HARPSI CHORD E.CLAVI CHORD × Harpsichord 8' × × × The sound of the instrument frequently used in baroque music. Variations in playing touch will not affect the volume, and a characteristic sound will be heard when you release the key. Harpsichord 8'+4' × × × A harpsichord with an added upper octave. Produces a more brilliant sound. E.Clavichord × × × This is the voice of a keyboard that produces sound by striking the strings with magnetic pickups. This funky sound is popular in black contemporary music. Because of its unique structure, the instrument produces a peculiar sound when you release the keys. Wah Clavi. × × × A distinctive effect is preset. × × Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play. × × A marimba sound, sampled in stereo for spaciousness and realism. × The sound of a celesta (a percussion instrument in which hammers strike metallic bars to produce sound). This instrument is well-known for its appearance in “Dance of the Sugar-plum Fairies” from Tchaikovsky’s “Nutcracker Suite.” Vibraphone Marimba VIBRAPHONE Celesta 108 Voice description CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual × × Voice group Voice name Stereo sampling Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance Voice description × × A warm and natural nylon-string guitar sound. Enjoy the atmosphere it adds to a quiet song. × × × A bright steel guitar sound. Ideal for popular music. NylonGuitar GUITAR SteelGuitar CHURCH ORGAN × PipeOrgan Principal × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument) organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music. PipeOrgan Tutti × × × × This voice features a full coupler of a pipe organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta and Fugue by Bach. PipeOrgan Flute1 × × × × A pipe organ sound that combines flute-type (woodwind type) stops of different pitches (8' + 4'). This is a gentle sound that is ideal for accompanying hymns. PipeOrgan Flute2 JAZZORGAN × × × × × × × The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. RotaryOrgan × × × × × A bright electric organ sound. MellowOrgan × × × × × A mellow electric organ sound. Ideal for calmer songs. × × × Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the Dual mode. × × × A bright and spacious strings sound. Suitable for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble. × × × The sound of a string ensemble, with a slow attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO. SynthStrings × SlowStrings CHOIR × JazzOrgan Strings STRINGS × A pipe organ sound that combines flute-type (woodwind type) stops of different pitches (8' + 4' + 1-1/3'). This is brighter than PipeOrganFlute1, and is suitable for solos. Choir × × × × A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. SlowChoir × × × × The sound of a choir with a slow attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO. Scat × × × You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice. Depending on how hard and what note range you play, different sounds will be produced. SynthPad1 × × × × A warm, mellow, and spacious synth sound. Ideal for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble. SynthPad2 × × × × A clear and spacious synth sound. Ideal for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble. WoodBass × × × The sound of a finger-plucked upright bass. Frequently used in jazz and Latin music. Bass&Cymbal × × × The sound of a cymbal has been layered onto the bass. Effective when used for jazz walking-bass lines. ElectricBass × × × × The sound of an electric bass. Frequently used in jazz, rock, and popular music. FretlessBass × × × × The sound of a fretless bass. Suitable for styles such as jazz and fusion. SYNTH.PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Appendix Preset Voice List 109 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) Dual MAIN + MAIN MAIN + MAIN MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1 GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2 GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2 MAIN + MAIN MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir E.Piano2 + E.Clavichord MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs This combination is often used in popular music. This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound. This combination sounds as if you are playing two notes that are one octave apart. It is suitable for the accompaniment of Salsa music. This is suitable for romantic ballads. This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul music. This combination is very suitable for Baroque music. This combination adds strings and bell sound. A delay effect is automatically applied. Appendix Split MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 / WoodBass or Bass&Cymbal MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1 MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat This is recommended for light Jazz music. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute song. Play these voices elegantly along with piano arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords would be more effective. This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding a variety of expressions. Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create an interesting sound. Dual + Split MAIN + MAIN / LEFT MAIN + MAIN / LEFT MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT 110 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual GrandPiano1 + SynthString / GrandPiano1 GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 / ElectricBass Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings / Harpsichord8' + Strings This combination creates the thick sound of a layered piano and strings. This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb and chorus (page 79) will improve the groove. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This combination makes a very brilliant sound. CLP-295GP: Keyboard Stand Assembly How to position the main unit CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can damage the stand. • Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing the assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers. Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom. TIP The CLP-295GP features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound when you open the lid with the longer stay (page 15). In order to optimize the iAFC effect, please observe the following: • Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the first time, and after each time you re-locate the Clavinova. (page 84) • Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova. 1. Remove all parts from the box. Confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are included. Main unit Spread a large soft cloth, such as a blanket, on the floor. Place the unit on the cloth with the key cover closed and the keyboard side on the bottom and lean the unit against the wall so that the unit will not fall or slip. Place a soft cloth against the wall to protect the instrument and the wall from scratches. CAUTION Appendix Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. Do not place the main unit with the rear side facing down. CAUTION Do not lay the main unit upside down on the floor. CAUTION Do not position the main unit so that its bottom is in contact with floor. Lean the unit against the wall as shown at right. Legs AC power cord Pedal box Cord holder 6 × 40 mm fixing screws × 12 6 × 20 mm fixing screws ×4 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 111 2. Attach two front legs and a rear leg. Refer to the diagram below to verify the orientation of the legs. Rear leg Front leg Front leg 3 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal connector. Insert the plug so the arrow side faces front (toward the keyboard). If the plug will not go in easily, do not force it. Double-check the orientation of the plug, then try again. 4 Attach the cord holder on the unit as shown in the illustration below, then use the cord holder to affix the pedal cord. 3 Install and tighten four 6 x 40 mm screws on each leg, starting with one of the front legs. 4 3. Install the pedal box. Appendix 1 Remove the twist tie that affixes the pedal cord to the upper portion of the pedal box. 4. Raising the unit to the standing position. Use the front legs as support to raise the unit. CAUTION Twist tie 2 Align the cord with the groove on the unit, and attach the pedal box using four 6 x 20 mm screws. 112 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual • Be careful not to pinch your fingers. • When you raise the unit, do not hold the key cover. 220 240 110 127 For models that feature a voltage selector: Set the voltage selector to an appropriate voltage. Right leg on the bottom of the main unit, when viewed from front Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the [AC INLET] and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. • Are there any parts left over? → Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? → Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? → Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? → Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? → Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. Appendix 5. Connect the power cord. Insert the AC power cord plug into the [AC INLET]. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Top portion Key cover 6. Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. After completing the assembly, please check the following. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 113 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks (Optional) An optional floppy disk drive can be installed to this instrument. For instructions on installing the floppy disk drive, see page 115. The floppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve created on the instrument to floppy disk, and allows you to load data from floppy disk to the instrument. Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. CAUTION Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed. Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive. Floppy Disk Compatibility • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors. • 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head Formatting a Floppy Disk • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head cleaning disks. • If you find that you are unable to use new, blank disks or old disks that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. For details on how to format a disk, see page 54. Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be lost after formatting. Make sure to check beforehand whether or not the disk contains important data. Appendix n Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be useable as is on other devices. Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. n Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Removing a Floppy Disk • After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the floppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the floppy disk drive is off), firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in. When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to eject it again. * Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has data. About Floppy Disks Handle floppy disks with care, and follow these precautions: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab): • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk's write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s write-protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). write-protect tab open (protect position) 114 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional) The optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included floppy disk drive case and screws. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. 1. Remove the three backing papers from the adhesive tape in the case, and fit the floppy disk drive into the case. 3. Attach the drive and case assembly to the left underside of the instrument, using the included four screws (4mm x 10mm). Appendix Insert the drive to the case, with the side having the rubber stoppers facing the case. 4. Dual-sided adhesive tape 2. Connect the USB cable to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown. CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 115 Specifications Item Keyboard Sound Source Polyphony (max) Voice Selection Effect CLP-295GP Natural Wood keyboard (real wood on white keys only) AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling 128 Panel preset for manual performance: 38 voices, XG voices: 480 voices + 12 drum kits, GM2 and GS voices for GM2/GS song playback Reverb, Chorus, Brilliance, Variation effect, Insertion effect x 3, iAFC Controls Dual, Split Display LCD Recording/Playback Memory Device Appendix Pedal Demo Songs 16-track recording/playback, tempo adjustment Optional USB storage device (via USB TO DEVICE terminal) Flash memory (internal): 1.7 MB Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft 16 voice demo songs, 50 preset songs Jacks/Terminals MIDI (IN/OUT/THRU), PHONES x 2, AUX IN (L/L+R, R), AUX OUT (L, R), USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE, AUX PEDAL Main Amplfiers 60W x 2 + 20W x 2 Speakers Dimensions (W x D x H) (Lid up) Weight Accessories 16cm x 2, 5cm x 2, 3cm (DOME) x 2, 10cm x 2 1,434 mm x 1,146 mm x 931 mm [56 1/2" x 45 1/8" x 36 2/3"] With music rest: (1,434 mm x 1,146 mm x 1,581 mm) [56 1/2" x 45 1/8" x 62 1/4"] 108kg [238 lbs., 2 oz] “50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection, Owner’s Manual, Data List, Bench (included or optional depending on locale), Accessory CD-ROM for Windows, Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 116 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual Index You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words. The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column. 50 greats for the Piano ............................... 5 50 Piano Preset Songs .............................. 22 Practicing a one-hand part................ 24 A A – D [–][+] buttons ............................... 12 A-B repeat................................................. 26 Accessories .................................................. 5 Adding variation to the sound ➔ Effect function..................................................... 29 Application Index....................................... 8 Assembly ................................................. 111 Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to a pedal ................................... 89 AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks ...................... 61 AUX OUT [L] [R] jacks........................... 61 [AUX PEDAL] jack .................................. 60 Auxiliary pedal function .......................... 88 B Backup ................................................ 93, 94 Bench .......................................................... 5 BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/[BRIGHT] buttons ...................................................... 29 C Calibration................................................ 84 Center pedal.............................................. 28 Center pedal function .............................. 87 CharacterCode.......................................... 55 Characters................................................. 55 [CHORUS] button................................... 30 combining two voices ➔ Dual mode...... 31 Connection Audio.................................................. 61 computer............................................ 65 Other Components............................ 60 Speaker ............................................... 61 USB [TO HOST] ............................... 65 [CONTRAST] knob................................. 17 CONTRAST*............................................ 17 Copy.......................................................... 51 Current memory ...................................... 45 Current song............................................. 45 D Damper (right) pedal ............................... 28 Data Compatibility................................. 106 Data type................................................... 59 Default (Normal) setting* ....................... 29 Delete ........................................................ 49 [DEMO] button ....................................... 20 Demonstration tunes ............................... 20 Detailed Settings ....................................... 68 Function ............................................. 85 iAFC.................................................... 83 Metronome ........................................ 76 recording and playback ..................... 73 voices .................................................. 77 display ....................................................... 12 Display contrast ........................................ 17 DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)......... 107 DOWN (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs ........................ 23 metronome......................................... 35 Driver ........................................................ 65 Dual Detailed settings ................................. 77 Recording ........................................... 44 Dual mode ➔ combining two voices...... 31 E Effect function .......................................... 29 equalizer.................................................... 81 ESEQ ....................................................... 106 [EXIT] button........................................... 13 External song ............................................ 45 [EXTRA PARTS] button.................... 36, 41 F FactorySet ................................................. 93 Fast forward ........................................ 23, 57 FILE* ......................................................... 45 [FILE/SONG SETTING] button ....... 45, 73 Floppy Disk..................................... 114, 115 Floppy Disk Drive .................................. 115 Format....................................................... 54 [FUNCTION] button ........................ 70, 85 G GM System Level 1 ................................. 106 GM System Level 2 ................................. 106 GS ............................................................ 107 H Headphones .............................................. 17 hub ............................................................ 62 I iAFC iAFC Detailed settings ....................... 83 [iAFC SETTING] button ................... 69, 83 J Jacks AUX IN............................................... 61 AUX OUT........................................... 61 AUX PEDAL....................................... 60 PHONES............................................. 17 K key cover.................................................... 14 KeyOffSampling........................................ 90 L LCD ➔ Screen Contrast .............................................. 17 [LEFT] button............................... 24, 36, 41 Left pedal................................................... 28 Left pedal function ................................... 87 Lid.............................................................. 15 List Demonstration tunes ......................... 20 Detailed Settings................................. 68 Message............................................... 95 Preset Voice ...................................... 108 M M ............................................................... 46 MakeDir .................................................... 54 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ....................... 17 MASTER VOLUME* ............................... 17 MEMORY ................................................. 57 Memory..................................................... 45 Memory song ............................................ 45 MemoryBackup ........................................ 93 Message List .............................................. 95 METRONOME [ON/OFF] button ......... 35 METRONOME [SETTING] button.. 68, 76 MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] terminals ...... 60 MIDI cables............................................... 66 Midi settings.............................................. 70 MIDI terminals ......................................... 66 Move.......................................................... 53 MP ............................................................. 46 MS.............................................................. 46 Ms .............................................................. 46 Music braces ............................................. 14 Music Data ................................................ 56 Music rest.................................................. 14 N New Song .................................................. 36 Normal setting* ........................................ 29 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual 117 Appendix Numerics Index O S Other settings ........................................... 85 Save............................................................ 48 Scale........................................................... 86 Select 50 piano preset songs......................... 22 Demo Songs ....................................... 21 Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 56 [SELECT] switch ...................................... 63 Selecting a touch response ....................... 85 SMF (Standard MIDI File) .................... 106 Soft (left) pedal ......................................... 28 Song Data Type ........................................... 59 Detailed settings ................................. 73 Playing back repeatedly ..................... 73 [SONG BALANCE] slider........................ 44 SONG SELECT Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 56 [SONG SELECT] button ................... 22, 56 SongAutoOpen ......................................... 55 Sostenuto (center) pedal .......................... 28 Sound brilliance............................................. 29 expression........................................... 29 reverberation ...................................... 30 spread and spaciousness .................... 30 Soundboard reverb................................... 30 Split Detailed settings ................................. 77 Recording ........................................... 44 [SPLIT] button ......................................... 33 Split mode ➔ playing two voices ............ 33 Split point ................................................. 34 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices .................................. 33 STOP 50 Piano Preset Songs ........................ 23 Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 58 [STOP] button.................................... 23, 58 Storage memory ....................................... 45 StringResonance ....................................... 90 SustainSampling ....................................... 90 Sync Start 50 preset songs ................................... 24 Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 57 P Appendix P ................................................................ 46 Parameter List........................................... 68 Pedal Function Auxiliary............................................. 88 Center ................................................. 87 Left...................................................... 87 Right ................................................... 87 Pedals ........................................................ 28 Personal computer ................................... 65 [PHONES] jacks....................................... 17 PhraseMark............................................... 73 PLAY/PAUSE 50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 22 Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 57 [PLAY/PAUSE] button ...................... 22, 57 Playback 50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 22 Demo Songs ....................................... 21 Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 57 Playing back repeatedly (song)................ 73 playing two voices ➔ Split mode ............ 33 [POWER] switch...................................... 16 Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset songs) 24 PRESET..................................................... 57 50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 22 Preset song memory................................. 45 Preset Voice List ..................................... 108 R [REC] button............................................ 37 Recording Tape Recorder.................................... 61 Recording in Dual .................................... 44 Recording in Split..................................... 44 Recording Your Performance.................. 36 Rename ..................................................... 50 [REPEAT] button..................................... 25 Repeat Playback........................................ 25 Re-recording a song partially................... 39 [REVERB] button .................................... 30 Rewind ................................................ 23, 57 [RIGHT] button........................... 24, 36, 41 Right pedal................................................ 28 Right pedal function ................................ 87 RIGHT/LEFT 50 Piano Preset Songs........................ 24 118 CLP-295GP Owner’s Manual T TEMPO 50 Piano Preset Songs ........................ 23 metronome......................................... 35 Recorded Songs and Music Data ...... 58 TEMPO [UP] [DOWN] buttons............. 35 Terminals MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] ........ 60, 66 USB [TO DEVICE] ............................ 60 USB [TO HOST]................................ 60 TouchResponse......................................... 85 Transpose .................................................. 85 Troubleshooting ..................................... 104 Tune .......................................................... 86 Type of characters..................................... 55 Type of data (recorded).......................... 101 U U1 .............................................................. 46 U1P............................................................ 46 U1S ............................................................ 46 U1s............................................................. 46 UP (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs ........................ 23 metronome......................................... 35 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal ................... 60 USB [TO HOST] terminal ....................... 60 USB storage device ................................... 62 USB1.......................................................... 57 V Voice group buttons........................... 27, 33 [VOICE SETTING] button................ 69, 77 Voices* ...................................................... 27 Detailed settings ................................. 77 Volume Balance (SONG BLANCE) ................ 44 Setting ................................................. 17 X XG............................................................ 106 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Electronic Piano Model Name : CLP-295GP This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) MEMO MEMO For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0660 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [CL] 38 Clavinova Web site (English only) http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2006 Yamaha Corporation WH31750 607MWAP?.?-01A0 Printed in Indonesia